[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2018171783A1 - Method, apparatus and system for signal transmission - Google Patents

Method, apparatus and system for signal transmission Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2018171783A1
WO2018171783A1 PCT/CN2018/080387 CN2018080387W WO2018171783A1 WO 2018171783 A1 WO2018171783 A1 WO 2018171783A1 CN 2018080387 W CN2018080387 W CN 2018080387W WO 2018171783 A1 WO2018171783 A1 WO 2018171783A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
symbol
reference signal
index
time domain
mapped
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2018/080387
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
孙裕
秦熠
栗忠峰
张雷鸣
窦圣跃
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from CN201710814891.8A external-priority patent/CN108632179B/en
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to BR112019019840A priority Critical patent/BR112019019840A2/en
Priority to JP2019552548A priority patent/JP7061619B2/en
Priority to KR1020197030983A priority patent/KR102305312B1/en
Priority to EP18772285.5A priority patent/EP3605977B1/en
Priority to CA3057550A priority patent/CA3057550A1/en
Publication of WO2018171783A1 publication Critical patent/WO2018171783A1/en
Priority to US16/580,773 priority patent/US20200022172A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/24Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field for communication between two or more posts
    • H04B7/26Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field for communication between two or more posts at least one of which is mobile
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L25/00Baseband systems
    • H04L25/02Details ; arrangements for supplying electrical power along data transmission lines

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of wireless communication technologies, and in particular, to a signal transmission method, apparatus, and system.
  • the frequency device the local oscillator
  • the random jitter of the local oscillator causes the output carrier signal to carry phase noise.
  • the phase noise is directly related to the carrier frequency: the phase noise power varies by 20 log(n), and n is the frequency multiplier, that is, the doubling of the carrier frequency increases the phase noise power by 6 dB. Therefore, for high frequency wireless communication, the phase noise effect cannot be ignored.
  • the 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) has included high-frequency into the spectrum range adopted in the future evolution of the new wireless radio network (NR), so the phase noise-related impact needs to be included. Design considerations.
  • phase noise estimation is to estimate the phase error using an inserted phase tracking reference signal (PT-RS).
  • PT-RS phase tracking reference signal
  • new radio has supported the symbol-level time domain density of various PT-RSs.
  • the PT-RS may be continuously mapped on each symbol of the PUSCH (or PDSCH) (ie, "1 time domain density” shown in the figure), or may be on the PUSCH (or PDSCH). Mapped once every 2 symbols (ie, "1/2 time domain density” shown in the figure), and can also be mapped once every 4 symbols of the PUSCH (or PDSCH) (ie, as shown in the figure) 1/4 time domain density").
  • the physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) and the physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) can be transmitted on the same symbol by frequency division, which results in demodulation reference signal (Demodulation Reference Signal).
  • PDSCH is also mapped on the symbol before DMRS). For example, as shown in FIG. 2, the DMRS is mapped on symbols 3, 4, the PDCCH is mapped on symbols 0, 1, and the PDSCH is also mapped on symbols 0, 1.
  • the symbol mapping scheme of the existing PT-RS as shown in FIG. 1 considers that the starting symbol of the PT-RS mapping is a symbol following the DMRS symbol, and can only be used to estimate the data channel mapped after the DMRS symbol. Phase noise.
  • the present application provides a signal transmission method, apparatus and system, which can ensure that a data channel mapped on a symbol before a DMRS also has a PT-RS mapping, thereby ensuring phase noise estimation performance.
  • the present application provides a signal transmission method, which is applied to a first device side (ie, a transmitting end), the method includes: the first device sends a first reference signal to a second device, where the first reference signal is used for phase track.
  • the first reference signal is mapped on the first symbol
  • the first symbol includes a symbol of a bearer data signal before the second symbol in the time domain unit
  • the second symbol refers to a bearer demodulation in the time domain unit.
  • the first symbol of the reference signal, or the second symbol refers to a plurality of consecutive symbols within the time domain unit, the consecutive plurality of symbols including a first symbol carrying a demodulation reference signal.
  • the present application provides a signal transmission method, which is applied to a second device side (ie, a receiving end).
  • the method includes: receiving, by a second device, a first reference signal sent by the first device.
  • the first reference signal is mapped on the first symbol, the first symbol includes a symbol of a bearer data signal before the second symbol in the time domain unit, and the second symbol refers to a bearer demodulation in the time domain unit.
  • the first symbol of the reference signal, or the second symbol refers to a plurality of consecutive symbols within the time domain unit, the consecutive plurality of symbols including a first symbol carrying a demodulation reference signal.
  • the second symbol is a symbol carrying the pre-loaded DMRS.
  • the first reference signal is PTRS.
  • mapping of the PT-RS may include the following two parts:
  • the symbol before the second symbol refers to the symbol whose index is smaller than the index of the second symbol
  • the symbol after the second symbol refers to the symbol whose index is larger than the index of the second symbol
  • the PT-RS can be mapped on the first symbol of the bearer data signal preceding the second symbol. That is to say, the PT-RS is mapped starting from the first symbol of the data channel (PUSCH/PDSCH). This ensures that the data channel on the symbol before the second symbol also has a PT-RS mapping, thereby ensuring phase noise estimation performance.
  • the second mapping rule before the second symbol, the index of the symbol used to carry the PT-RS is related to the first difference, and the first difference (H2) is the index (l 0 ) of the first symbol carrying the DMRS.
  • the first mapping rule after the second symbol, the index of the starting symbol mapped by the PT-RS may be determined by the time domain density of the PT-RS. And in the order in which the symbol index values are incremented, the PT-RS is mapped on the symbol with the smallest index among every L symbols. L is the reciprocal of the time domain density of the PT-RS.
  • the time domain density of the PT-RS may be related to at least one of a CP type, a subcarrier spacing, and a modulation order.
  • a CP type a subcarrier spacing
  • a modulation order a modulation order for details, refer to the following content, and details are not described herein.
  • the time domain density of the PT-RS, and the mapping relationship between the time domain density of the PT-RS and the index of the start symbol mapped by the PT-RS may be predefined by a protocol, or may be passed by the network device through a high layer letter. Order (such as RRC signaling) or PDCCH configuration.
  • the PT-RS can be uniformly mapped over the entire time domain symbol (including the second symbol, the symbol before the second symbol and the symbol after the second symbol).
  • the PT-RS is also uniformly mapped on the symbol following the second symbol.
  • the mapping priority of the PT-RS is lower than the PDCCH or the PUCCH or the SS block or the CSI-RS or the SRS.
  • the PT-RS is mapped on the last symbol of the bearer data signal after the second symbol, and uniformly mapped on the symbol following the second symbol in descending order of the symbol index value.
  • a fourth mapping rule, after the second symbol, the index of the symbol used to carry the PT-RS is related to the number of symbols after the second symbol.
  • the PTRS mapping carries the first symbol of the data signal (PDSCH/PUSCH) in the time domain unit.
  • the PTRS maps the smallest symbol in each L symbols in the order in which the symbol index values are incremented. That is, starting from the first symbol carrying the data signal, the PT-RS can be uniformly mapped in the time domain unit.
  • L is the reciprocal of the symbol-level time domain density of the PTRS, and the value of L can be determined according to the symbol-level time domain density of the PTRS, for example, the value may be ⁇ 1, 2, 4 ⁇ .
  • the location of the symbol carrying the PTRS may be the symbol carrying the pre-loaded DMRS (ie, the second symbol)
  • the position of the ) and the first symbol of the bearer data signal (PDSCH/PUSCH) are related to the last symbol.
  • the first symbol carrying the data signal refers to a symbol having the smallest index among the symbols of the bearer data signal (PDSCH/PUSCH) in the time domain unit.
  • the last symbol carrying the data signal refers to the symbol with the largest index among the symbols of the bearer data signal (PDSCH/PUSCH) in the time domain unit.
  • the PT-RS may be uniformly mapped on the symbol before the second symbol in the order of increasing symbol index values.
  • the PT-RS may be uniformly mapped on the symbol following the second symbol in descending order of the symbol index value.
  • the location of the symbol carrying the PTRS may be related to the location of the symbol carrying the pre-loaded DMRS (ie, the second symbol).
  • the location of the symbol carrying the PTRS is also the symbol carrying the pre-loaded DMRS (ie, the second symbol)
  • the symbol index in the time domain unit is smaller than the number of symbols of the index of the first symbol carrying the pre-loaded DMRS, and the time domain.
  • the intra-unit symbol index is related to the number of symbols of the index of the last symbol of the pre-loaded DMRS.
  • the index of the last symbol carrying the PTRS before the second symbol is related to the first difference. Moreover, starting from the index of the last symbol carrying the PTRS, the PTRS is uniformly mapped on the symbol of the bearer data signal preceding the second symbol in descending order of the symbol index. Specifically, in the time domain unit, the index of the first symbol carrying the PTRS after the second symbol is related to the number of symbols after the second symbol. Moreover, starting from the index of the first symbol carrying the PTRS, the PTRS is uniformly mapped on the symbol following the second symbol in the order in which the symbol index is incremented.
  • the PTRS may be uniformly mapped on the symbol following the second symbol in an increasing order of the symbol index.
  • the index is l 0 -1 Map the PTRS on the symbol.
  • the PTRS may be uniformly mapped on the symbol before the second symbol in descending order of the symbol index.
  • the PTRS may be uniformly mapped on the symbol following the second symbol in an increasing order of the symbol index.
  • the index is l 0 -2 Map the PTRS on the symbol.
  • the PTRS may be evenly mapped on the symbol before the second symbol in descending order of the symbol index.
  • the PTRS may be uniformly mapped on the symbol following the second symbol in an increasing order of the symbol index.
  • the difference H 2 between the index of the first symbol of the bearer data signal (PDSCH/PUSCH) before the pre-loaded DMRS and the index of the first symbol of the pre-loaded DMRS is an integer multiple of 4, and the index is l 0 PTRS is mapped on the -4 symbol.
  • the PTRS may be uniformly mapped on the symbol before the second symbol in descending order of the symbol index.
  • the PTRS may be uniformly mapped on the symbol following the second symbol in an increasing order of the symbol index.
  • the PTRS may be uniformly mapped on the symbol before the second symbol in descending order of the symbol index.
  • the PTRS may be uniformly mapped on the symbol following the second symbol in an increasing order of the symbol index.
  • the PTRS may be uniformly mapped on the symbol before the second symbol in descending order of the symbol index.
  • the PTRS may uniformly map the symbols after the second symbol in an increasing order of the symbol index.
  • the PTRS may be uniformly mapped on the symbol before the second symbol in descending order of the symbol index.
  • the index l of the symbol carrying the PT-RS can be expressed by the following formula:
  • L represents the reciprocal of the time domain symbol-level density of PTRS;
  • H 1 represents the number of symbols after the second symbol; represents H2 of the first difference;
  • l 0 indicates the index of the first symbol carrying the pre-loaded DMRS, and
  • l DM-RS indicates the index of the last symbol of the pre-loaded DMRS.
  • the mapping priority of the phase tracking reference signal may be lower than at least one of the following: a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH), physical uplink control Physical uplink control channel (PUCCH), synchronize signal block (SS block), channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS), and sounding reference signal (SRS) , demodulation reference signal (DMRS), etc. That is to say, the PT-RS is not mapped on a resource that needs to map any of the above signals. In this way, by establishing a mapping priority between the PT-RS and other reference signals and physical channels, when a resource conflict occurs between the PT-RS and other reference signals and physical channels, the collision can be avoided by not mapping the PT-RS.
  • PDCCH physical downlink control channel
  • PUCCH physical uplink control Physical uplink control channel
  • SS block synchronize signal block
  • CSI-RS channel state information reference signal
  • SRS sounding reference signal
  • DMRS demodulation reference signal
  • the present application provides a signal transmission method, which is applied to a network device side, and includes: the network device sends first indication information.
  • the first indication information indicates the location of the time-frequency resource occupied by the at least two groups of the first reference signals, and the antenna ports associated with each of the at least two groups of the first reference signals are not quasi-co-located.
  • the network device sends a data signal, and the data signal is not mapped on the time-frequency resources occupied by the at least two sets of first reference signals.
  • the present application provides a signal transmission method, which is applied to a terminal device side, where the method includes: the terminal device receives the first indication information, where the first indication information indicates the time-frequency resources occupied by the at least two groups of the first reference signals. Position, the antenna ports associated with each of the at least two sets of first reference signals are not quasi-co-located. Then, the terminal device determines, according to the first indication information, time-frequency resources occupied by at least two groups of first reference signals. The terminal device receives the data signal, and the data signal is not mapped on the time-frequency resource occupied by the at least two groups of the first reference signals.
  • the data may be transmitted on the resources of the PTRS transmitted by other transmission points (TRP) Rate matching (that is, no mapping of data) can avoid interference caused by data transmitted by different transmission points to PTRS, thereby ensuring phase noise estimation performance of PTRS.
  • TRP transmission points
  • Rate matching that is, no mapping of data
  • the first indication information may include the first information and the second information, where The first information is used to determine a subcarrier occupied by the PTRS, and the second information is used to determine a symbol occupied by the PTRS.
  • the first information may include at least one of the following: the sending enable information of the PTRS, the indication information of the DMRS port associated with the antenna port of the PTRS in the DMRS Port group, the indication information of the DMRS port group, or the frequency domain density of the PTRS. Indicates the association relationship with the scheduling bandwidth threshold.
  • the second information may include indication information of a relationship between a time domain density of the PTRS and an MCS threshold.
  • the subcarrier occupied by the first reference signal includes: a frequency domain density corresponding to a maximum scheduling bandwidth of the third device scheduled to the fourth device Subcarriers.
  • the symbol occupied by the first reference signal includes: the time domain density corresponding to the maximum modulation order of the third device scheduled to the fourth device Subcarriers.
  • the present application provides a communication device, which may include a plurality of functional modules for respectively performing the method provided by the first aspect, or any one of the possible embodiments of the first aspect. The method provided.
  • the present application provides a communication device, which may include a plurality of functional modules for respectively performing the method provided by the second aspect, or any one of the possible embodiments of the second aspect. The method provided.
  • the present application provides a communication apparatus for performing the signal transmission method described in the first aspect.
  • the terminal can include a memory and a processor, transceiver coupled to the memory, wherein the transceiver is for communicating with other communication devices.
  • the memory is for storing implementation code of a signal transmission method described in the first aspect
  • the processor is for executing program code stored in the memory, that is, performing the method provided by the first aspect, or a possible implementation of the first aspect The method provided by any of the modes.
  • the present application provides a communication apparatus for performing the signal transmission method described in the first aspect.
  • the network device can include a memory and a processor, transceiver coupled to the memory, wherein the transceiver is for communicating with other communication devices.
  • the memory is for storing implementation code of a signal transmission method described in the first aspect
  • the processor is for executing program code stored in the memory, that is, performing the method provided by the first aspect, or a possible implementation of the first aspect The method provided by any of the modes.
  • the application provides a chip, the chip can include a processor, and one or more interfaces coupled to the processor.
  • the processor may be configured to invoke, from a memory, a signal transmission method provided by the first aspect, or an implementation program of a signal transmission method provided by any one of the possible implementations of the first aspect, and execute the program including Instructions.
  • the interface can be used to output processing results of the processor.
  • the application provides a chip
  • the chip can include a processor, and one or more interfaces coupled to the processor.
  • the processor may be configured to invoke, from a memory, a signal transmission method provided by the first aspect, or an implementation program of a signal transmission method provided by any one of the possible implementations of the first aspect, and execute the program including Instructions.
  • the interface can be used to output processing results of the processor.
  • the application provides a network device, which may include multiple functional modules for respectively performing the method provided by the third aspect, or any one of the possible implementation manners of the third aspect. The method provided.
  • the present application provides a terminal device, which may include a plurality of functional modules for respectively performing the method provided by the fourth aspect, or any one of the possible implementation manners of the fourth aspect The method provided.
  • the present application provides a network device for performing the signal transmission method described in the third aspect.
  • the terminal device can include a memory and a processor, transceiver coupled to the memory, wherein the transceiver is for communicating with other communication devices, such as network devices.
  • the memory is for storing implementation code of the signal transmission method described in the third aspect
  • the processor is configured to execute the program code stored in the memory, that is, to perform the method provided by the third aspect, or the third aspect possible implementation The method provided by any of the modes.
  • the present application provides a terminal device for performing the signal transmission method described in the fourth aspect.
  • the terminal device can include a memory and a processor, transceiver coupled to the memory, wherein the transceiver is for communicating with other communication devices, such as terminals.
  • the memory is for storing implementation code of a signal transmission method described in the fourth aspect
  • the processor is configured to execute program code stored in the memory, that is, to perform the method provided by the fourth aspect, or a possible implementation of the fourth aspect The method provided by any of the modes.
  • the application provides a chip, the chip can include a processor, and one or more interfaces coupled to the processor.
  • the processor may be used to invoke a signal transmission method provided by the third aspect from the memory, or an implementation program of the signal transmission method provided by any one of the possible implementation manners of the third aspect, and execute the program including Instructions.
  • the interface can be used to output processing results of the processor.
  • the application provides a chip, the chip can include a processor, and one or more interfaces coupled to the processor.
  • the processor may be used to invoke a signal transmission method provided by the fourth aspect from the memory, or an implementation program of the signal transmission method provided by any one of the possible implementations of the fourth aspect, and execute the program including Instructions.
  • the interface can be used to output processing results of the processor.
  • the present application provides a wireless communication system, including a first device and a second device, where: the first device is operable to perform the signal transmission method provided by the first aspect, or the first aspect is possible a signal transmission method provided by any one of the embodiments; the second device may be configured to perform the signal transmission method provided by the second aspect, or the signal transmission provided by any one of the possible implementations of the second aspect method.
  • the first device may be the communication device described in the fifth aspect or the seventh aspect
  • the second device may be the communication device described in the sixth aspect or the eighth aspect.
  • the present application provides a wireless communication system, including a terminal device and a network device, where: the terminal is operative to perform the signal transmission method provided by the third aspect, or in a possible implementation manner of the third aspect Any of the provided signal transmission methods; the network device may be used to perform the signal transmission method provided by the fourth aspect, or the signal transmission method provided by any of the possible implementations of the fourth aspect.
  • the terminal device may be the network device described in the eleventh aspect or the thirteenth aspect, and the network device may be the terminal device described in the twelfth aspect or the fourteenth aspect.
  • a nineteenth aspect a computer readable storage medium having stored thereon a signal transmission method for implementing the first aspect, or any one of the possible embodiments of the first aspect
  • the program code of the signal transmission method comprising the execution of the signal transmission method provided by the first aspect, or the execution instruction of the signal transmission method provided by any of the possible implementations of the first aspect.
  • a computer readable storage medium storing a signal transmission method implemented by implementing the second aspect, or any one of the possible embodiments of the second aspect
  • a program code of a signal transmission method the program code comprising an execution instruction of a signal transmission method provided by the operation of the signal transmission method provided by the second aspect, or any one of the possible implementations of the second aspect.
  • a twenty-first aspect a computer readable storage medium storing the signal transmission method provided by the second aspect, or any one of the possible embodiments of the second aspect is provided
  • a program code for providing a signal transmission method the program code comprising an execution instruction of a signal transmission method provided by operating the second aspect, or a signal transmission method provided by any one of the possible implementations of the second aspect.
  • a twenty-second aspect a computer readable storage medium storing the signal transmission method provided by the second aspect, or any one of the possible embodiments of the second aspect is provided
  • a program code for providing a signal transmission method the program code comprising an execution instruction of a signal transmission method provided by operating the second aspect, or a signal transmission method provided by any one of the possible implementations of the second aspect.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a rule for mapping a PTRS in a time domain in the prior art
  • 2 is a schematic diagram of mapping PDSCH on symbols before DMRS
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic structural diagram of a wireless communication system according to the present application.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a hardware architecture of a terminal provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of a hardware architecture of a network device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of resource mapping of a DMRS according to the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic flow chart of a signal transmission method provided by the present application.
  • 9A-9L are schematic diagrams of PTRS time domain mapping rules provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 10A-10L are schematic diagrams of PTRS time domain mapping rules provided by another embodiment of the present application.
  • 11A-11C are schematic diagrams of PTRS time domain mapping rules provided by still another embodiment of the present application.
  • 12A-12D are schematic diagrams of PTRS time domain mapping rules provided by still another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of a scenario of non-interfering joint transmission involved in the present application.
  • 16 is a functional block diagram of a related device of a wireless communication system provided by the present application.
  • 17 is a functional block diagram of another related apparatus of the wireless communication system provided by the present application.
  • Figure 18 is a schematic structural view of an apparatus provided by the present application.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic structural view of a device provided by the present application.
  • FIG. 3 shows a wireless communication system to which the present application relates.
  • the wireless communication system can work in a high frequency band, is not limited to a Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, and can be a fifth generation mobile communication (5th generation, 5G) system, a new air interface (NR). System, machine to machine (Machine to Machine, M2M) system.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • 5G fifth generation mobile communication
  • NR new air interface
  • M2M machine to machine
  • the wireless communication system 10 can include one or more network devices 101, one or more terminals 103, and a core network 115. among them:
  • the network device 101 can be a base station, and the base station can be used for communicating with one or more terminals, and can also be used for communicating with one or more base stations having partial terminal functions (such as a macro base station and a micro base station, such as an access point, Communication between).
  • the base station may be a Base Transceiver Station (BTS) in a Time Division Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access (TD-SCDMA) system, or may be an evolved base station in an LTE system (Evolutional Node B). , eNB), and base stations in 5G systems, new air interface (NR) systems.
  • the base station may also be an Access Point (AP), a TransNode (Trans TRP), a Central Unit (CU), or other network entity, and may include some or all of the functions of the above network entities. .
  • Terminals 103 may be distributed throughout wireless communication system 100, either stationary or mobile.
  • terminal 103 may be a mobile device, a mobile station, a mobile unit, an M2M terminal, a wireless unit, a remote unit, a user agent, a mobile client, and the like.
  • network device 101 can be used to communicate with terminal 103 over one or more antennas under the control of a network device controller (not shown).
  • the network device controller may be part of the core network 115 or may be integrated into the network device 101.
  • the network device 101 can be configured to transmit control information or user data to the core network 115 through a blackhaul interface 113 (such as an S1 interface).
  • the network device 101 and the network device 101 can also communicate with each other directly or indirectly through a blackhaul interface 111 (such as an X2 interface).
  • FIG. 3 shows a wireless communication system to which the present application relates.
  • the wireless communication system can work in a high frequency band, is not limited to a Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, and can be a fifth generation mobile communication (5th generation, 5G) system, a new air interface (NR). System, machine to machine (Machine to Machine, M2M) system.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • 5G fifth generation mobile communication
  • NR new air interface
  • M2M machine to machine
  • the wireless communication system 10 can include one or more network devices 101, one or more terminals 103, and a core network 115. among them:
  • the network device 101 can be a base station, and the base station can be used for communicating with one or more terminals, and can also be used for communicating with one or more base stations having partial terminal functions (such as a macro base station and a micro base station, such as an access point, Communication between).
  • the base station may be a Base Transceiver Station (BTS) in a Time Division Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access (TD-SCDMA) system, or may be an evolved base station in an LTE system (Evolutional Node B). , eNB), and base stations in 5G systems, new air interface (NR) systems.
  • the base station may also be an Access Point (AP), a TransNode (Trans TRP), a Central Unit (CU), or other network entity, and may include some or all of the functions of the above network entities. .
  • Terminals 103 may be distributed throughout wireless communication system 100, either stationary or mobile.
  • terminal 103 may be a mobile device, a mobile station, a mobile unit, an M2M terminal, a wireless unit, a remote unit, a user agent, a mobile client, and the like.
  • network device 101 can be used to communicate with terminal 103 over one or more antennas under the control of a network device controller (not shown).
  • the network device controller may be part of the core network 115 or may be integrated into the network device 101.
  • the network device 101 can be configured to transmit control information or user data to the core network 115 through a blackhaul interface 113 (such as an S1 interface).
  • the network device 101 and the network device 101 can also communicate with each other directly or indirectly through a blackhaul interface 111 (such as an X2 interface).
  • the wireless communication system shown in FIG. 3 is only for the purpose of more clearly explaining the technical solution of the present application, and does not constitute a limitation of the present application. As those skilled in the art can understand, with the network architecture
  • the terminal 200 may include: one or more terminal processors 201, a memory 202, a communication interface 203, a receiver 205, a transmitter 206, a coupler 207, an antenna 208, a user interface 202, and an input and output module. (including audio input and output module 210, key input module 211, display 212, etc.). These components can be connected by bus 204 or other means, and FIG. 4 is exemplified by a bus connection. among them:
  • Communication interface 203 can be used by terminal 200 to communicate with other communication devices, such as network devices.
  • the network device may be the network device 300 shown in FIG. 8.
  • the communication interface 203 may be a Long Term Evolution (LTE) (4G) communication interface, or may be a 5G or a future communication interface of a new air interface.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • 5G Fifth Generation
  • the terminal 200 may be configured with a wired communication interface 203, such as a Local Access Network (LAN) interface.
  • LAN Local Access Network
  • Transmitter 206 can be used to perform transmission processing, such as signal modulation, on signals output by terminal processor 201.
  • Receiver 205 can be used to perform reception processing, such as signal demodulation, on the mobile communication signals received by antenna 208.
  • transmitter 206 and receiver 205 can be viewed as a wireless modem.
  • the number of the transmitter 206 and the receiver 205 may each be one or more.
  • the antenna 208 can be used to convert electromagnetic energy in a transmission line into electromagnetic waves in free space or to convert electromagnetic waves in free space into electromagnetic energy in a transmission line.
  • the coupler 207 is configured to divide the mobile communication signal received by the antenna 208 into multiple channels and distribute it to a plurality of receivers 205.
  • the terminal 200 may also include other communication components such as a GPS module, a Bluetooth module, a Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) module, and the like. Not limited to the above-described wireless communication signals, the terminal 200 can also support other wireless communication signals such as satellite signals, short-wave signals, and the like. Not limited to wireless communication, the terminal 200 may also be configured with a wired network interface (such as a LAN interface) to support wired communication.
  • a wired network interface such as a LAN interface
  • the input and output module can be used to implement the interaction between the terminal 200 and the user/external environment, and can include the audio input and output module 210, the key input module 211, the display 212, and the like. Specifically, the input and output module may further include: a camera, a touch screen, a sensor, and the like. The input and output modules communicate with the terminal processor 201 through the user interface 209.
  • Memory 202 is coupled to terminal processor 201 for storing various software programs and/or sets of instructions.
  • memory 202 can include high speed random access memory, and can also include non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid state storage devices.
  • the memory 202 can store an operating system (hereinafter referred to as a system) such as an embedded operating system such as ANDROID, IOS, WINDOWS, or LINUX.
  • the memory 202 can also store a network communication program that can be used to communicate with one or more additional devices, one or more terminal devices, one or more network devices.
  • the memory 202 can also store a user interface program, which can realistically display the content of the application through a graphical operation interface, and receive user control operations on the application through input controls such as menus, dialog boxes, and keys. .
  • the memory 202 can be used to store an implementation of the signal transmission method provided by one or more embodiments of the present application on the terminal 200 side.
  • the resource mapping method provided by one or more embodiments of the present application, please refer to the subsequent embodiments.
  • Terminal processor 201 can be used to read and execute computer readable instructions. Specifically, the terminal processor 201 can be used to invoke a program stored in the memory 212, such as a resource mapping method provided by one or more embodiments of the present application, to implement the program on the terminal 200 side, and execute the instructions included in the program.
  • a program stored in the memory 212 such as a resource mapping method provided by one or more embodiments of the present application, to implement the program on the terminal 200 side, and execute the instructions included in the program.
  • the terminal 200 can be the terminal 103 in the wireless communication system 100 shown in FIG. 5, and can be implemented as a mobile device, a mobile station, a mobile unit, a wireless unit, a remote unit, and a user agent. , mobile client and more.
  • the terminal 200 shown in FIG. 4 is only one implementation of the embodiment of the present application. In an actual application, the terminal 200 may further include more or less components, which are not limited herein.
  • network device 300 can include one or more network device processors 301, memory 302, communication interface 303, transmitter 305, receiver 306, coupler 307, and antenna 308. These components can be connected via bus 304 or other types, and FIG. 5 is exemplified by a bus connection. among them:
  • Communication interface 303 can be used by network device 300 to communicate with other communication devices, such as terminal devices or other network devices.
  • the terminal device may be the terminal 200 shown in FIG. 5.
  • the communication interface 303 may be a Long Term Evolution (LTE) (4G) communication interface, or may be a 5G or a future communication interface of a new air interface.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • the network device 300 may also be configured with a wired communication interface 303 to support wired communication.
  • the backhaul link between one network device 300 and other network devices 300 may be a wired communication connection.
  • Transmitter 305 can be used to perform transmission processing, such as signal modulation, on signals output by network device processor 301.
  • Receiver 306 can be used to perform reception processing on the mobile communication signals received by antenna 308. For example, signal demodulation.
  • transmitter 305 and receiver 306 can be viewed as a wireless modem. In the network device 300, the number of the transmitter 305 and the receiver 306 may each be one or more.
  • the antenna 308 can be used to convert electromagnetic energy in a transmission line into electromagnetic waves in free space, or to convert electromagnetic waves in free space into electromagnetic energy in a transmission line.
  • Coupler 307 can be used to divide the mobile pass signal into multiple channels and distribute it to multiple receivers 306.
  • Memory 302 is coupled to network device processor 301 for storing various software programs and/or sets of instructions.
  • memory 302 may include high speed random access memory, and may also include non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid state storage devices.
  • the memory 302 can store an operating system (hereinafter referred to as a system) such as an embedded operating system such as uCOS, VxWorks, or RTLinux.
  • the memory 302 can also store a network communication program that can be used to communicate with one or more additional devices, one or more terminal devices, one or more network devices.
  • the network device processor 301 can be used to perform wireless channel management, implement call and communication link establishment and teardown, and provide cell handover control and the like for users in the control area.
  • the network device processor 301 may include: an Administration Module/Communication Module (AM/CM) (a center for voice exchange and information exchange), and a Basic Module (BM) (for Complete call processing, signaling processing, radio resource management, radio link management and circuit maintenance functions), code conversion and sub-multiplexer (TCSM) (for multiplexing demultiplexing and code conversion functions) )and many more.
  • AM/CM Administration Module/Communication Module
  • BM Basic Module
  • TCSM code conversion and sub-multiplexer
  • the network device processor 301 can be used to read and execute computer readable instructions. Specifically, the network device processor 301 can be used to invoke a program stored in the memory 302, such as the resource mapping method provided by one or more embodiments of the present application, on the network device 300 side, and execute the instructions included in the program. .
  • the network device 300 can be the base station 101 in the wireless communication system 100 shown in FIG. 5, and can be implemented as a base transceiver station, a wireless transceiver, a basic service set (BSS), and an extended service set (ESS). NodeB, eNodeB, access point or TRP, etc.
  • the network device 300 shown in FIG. 5 is only one implementation of the embodiment of the present application. In actual applications, the network device 300 may further include more or fewer components, which are not limited herein.
  • the present application provides a resource mapping method.
  • the main principle of the present application may include mapping a phase tracking reference signal (PT-RS) on a symbol of a bearer data signal before a symbol carrying a pre-loaded DMRS (DMRS).
  • PT-RS phase tracking reference signal
  • DMRS pre-loaded DMRS
  • a symbol carrying a preloaded DMRS may be referred to as a second symbol.
  • the second symbol refers to a contiguous at least one symbol carrying a DMRS, the at least one symbol comprising a first symbol carrying a DMRS.
  • the DMRS may include a front-loaded DMRS (pre-loaded DMRS) and an additional DMRS (additional-DMRS).
  • preloaded DMRS refers to a DMRS that continuously occupies one or more DMRS symbols with the smallest index in the DMRS symbol.
  • additional DMRS refers to other DMRSs other than the preloaded DMRS.
  • the DMRS symbol refers to a symbol carrying a DMRS.
  • the DMRS symbols are: symbol 3, symbol 4, and symbol 7.
  • the symbols carrying the pre-loaded DMRS are two consecutive symbols: symbol 3 and symbol 4, where symbol 3 is the first symbol carrying the DMRS, ie the first DMRS symbol.
  • the examples are merely illustrative of the application and should not be construed as limiting.
  • the mapping priority of the phase tracking reference signal may be lower than at least one of the following: a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH), a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH), and a synchronization signal block ( The synchronization signal block (SS block), the channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS), the sounding reference signal (SRS), the demodulation reference signal (DMRS), and the like. That is to say, the PT-RS is not mapped on a resource that needs to map any of the above signals. In this way, by establishing a mapping priority between the PT-RS and other reference signals and physical channels, when a resource conflict occurs between the PT-RS and other reference signals and physical channels, the collision can be avoided by not mapping the PT-RS.
  • a mapping priority between the PT-RS and other reference signals and physical channels when a resource conflict occurs between the PT-RS and other reference signals and physical channels, the collision can be avoided by not mapping the PT-RS.
  • mapping of the PT-RS may include the following two parts:
  • the symbol before the second symbol refers to the symbol whose index is smaller than the index of the second symbol
  • the symbol after the second symbol refers to the symbol whose index is larger than the index of the second symbol.
  • the second symbol is: symbol 3 and symbol 4
  • the symbols before the second symbol are: symbol 0-2
  • the symbols following the second symbol are: symbols 5-13.
  • the examples are merely illustrative of the application and should not be construed as limiting.
  • the PT-RS is mapped on the first symbol of the bearer data signal preceding the second symbol. That is to say, the PT-RS is mapped starting from the first symbol of the data channel (PUSCH/PDSCH). This ensures that the data channel on the symbol before the second symbol also has a PT-RS mapping, thereby ensuring phase noise estimation performance.
  • This mapping method is described in detail in subsequent embodiments 1 and 2, and will not be described here.
  • the second mapping rule before the second symbol, the index of the symbol used to carry the PT-RS is related to the first difference, and the first difference (H2) is the index (l 0 ) of the first symbol carrying the DMRS.
  • the PT-RS may be mapped to the symbol of the bearer data signal before the second symbol in other manners, which is not limited in this application.
  • the first mapping rule after the second symbol, the index of the starting symbol mapped by the PT-RS may be determined by the time domain density of the PT-RS. And in the order in which the symbol index values are incremented, the PT-RS is mapped on the symbol with the smallest index among every L symbols. L is the reciprocal of the time domain density of the PT-RS.
  • the start symbol mapped by the PT-RS is the first symbol after the second symbol, that is, the symbol 3.
  • the time domain density of the PT-RS is "1/2"
  • the start symbol mapped by the PT-RS is the second symbol after the second symbol, that is, the symbol 4.
  • the time domain density of the PT-RS is "1/4"
  • the start symbol mapped by the PT-RS is the first symbol after the second symbol, that is, the symbol 3.
  • the time domain density of the PT-RS may be related to at least one of a CP type, a subcarrier spacing, and a modulation order.
  • a CP type a CP type
  • a subcarrier spacing a subcarrier spacing
  • a modulation order a modulation order
  • the time domain density of the PT-RS, and the mapping relationship between the time domain density of the PT-RS and the index of the start symbol mapped by the PT-RS may be predefined by a protocol, or may be passed by the network device through a high layer letter. Order (such as RRC signaling) or PDCCH configuration.
  • the PTRS starts to map from the first symbol of the physical data sharing channel (PDSCH/PUSCH), and uniformly maps the time domain symbols in the time domain unit (including the second symbol, the symbol before the second symbol, and the On the symbol after the second symbol).
  • the PT-RS is also uniformly mapped on the symbol following the second symbol.
  • the mapping priority of the PT-RS is lower than the PDCCH or the PUCCH or the SS block or the CSI-RS or the SRS. This mapping method will be described in detail in the following embodiments, and will not be described here.
  • a third mapping rule the PT-RS is mapped on the last symbol of the bearer data signal after the second symbol, and uniformly mapped on the symbol following the second symbol in descending order of the symbol index value. This mapping method will be described in detail in the following second embodiment, and will not be described here.
  • a fourth mapping rule, after the second symbol, the index of the symbol used to carry the PT-RS is related to the number of symbols after the second symbol. This mapping method will be described in detail in the following third embodiment, and will not be described here.
  • the above four mapping methods can achieve uniform mapping of the PT-RS on the symbol after the second symbol.
  • the PT-RS may also be mapped to the symbols following the second symbol in other manners, which is not limited in this application.
  • the time domain density of the PT-RS may be the same or different before and after the second symbol.
  • the resources involved in the present application refer to time-frequency resources, including time domain resources and frequency domain resources, and are usually resource elements (Resource Element, RE), Resource Block (RB), symbol (symbol), and subcarrier (subcarrier).
  • TTI Transmission Time Interval
  • the entire system resource is composed of a frequency domain and a time domain divided grid, wherein one grid represents one RE, and one RE is composed of one subcarrier on the frequency and one symbol on the time domain.
  • the index values of the symbols correspond to the timing from first to last in the order of small to large, that is, the symbols whose symbol index values are small in time series are in front of the symbols with large symbol index values.
  • the present application does not limit the specific symbol index and timing correspondence.
  • the symbol index values may correspond to the timing from first to last in descending order.
  • the present application provides a drawing for explaining only the embodiment of the present invention.
  • the size of the resource block in the future communication standard, the number of symbols included in the resource block, the number of subcarriers, and the like may be different.
  • the resources mentioned in this application. The blocks are not limited to the drawings.
  • FIG. 8 shows the overall flow of a signal transmission method provided by the present application. The following expands the description:
  • the first device maps the first reference signal (PT-RS) on the first symbol.
  • the first symbol includes a symbol of a bearer data signal whose index is smaller than an index of the second symbol (preloaded DMRS symbol), and the second symbol refers to at least one symbol carrying a DMRS, the at least one symbol includes a bearer.
  • the first symbol of the DMRS is a symbol of a bearer data signal whose index is smaller than an index of the second symbol (preloaded DMRS symbol)
  • the first device may map the PT-RS to the time domain according to the time domain density of the PT-RS and the PT-RS time domain mapping rule predefined by the protocol.
  • the PT-RS time domain mapping rule on the symbol before the second symbol and the PT-RS time domain mapping rule on the symbol after the second symbol, reference may be made to the foregoing inventive principles and subsequent embodiments, and details are not described herein. .
  • the first device sends a first reference signal (PT-RS) to the second device.
  • the second device receives the first reference signal (PT-RS) sent by the first device.
  • the second device may determine, according to the time domain density of the first reference signal (PT-RS), the static definition of the protocol, or the high-level signaling, configure the PT-RS time domain mapping rule, and determine to carry the first reference signal (PT).
  • the symbol of the -RS) ie the first symbol
  • the first reference signal (PT-RS) is received on these time domain symbols.
  • the second device performs phase tracking according to the first reference signal (PT-RS).
  • the PT-RS time domain mapping rule may be statically defined by the protocol or configured by higher layer signaling.
  • the symbols on which the first reference signal (PT-RS) is mapped may be determined according to the time domain density of the first reference signal (PT-RS) (refer to the following first embodiment).
  • the symbols on which the first reference signal (PT-RS) is mapped may be determined according to the time domain density of the first reference signal (PT-RS) and the position of the symbol carrying the pre-loaded DMRS (ie, the second symbol) (refer to Subsequent Embodiments 2 and 3).
  • the time domain density of the PT-RS may be related to at least one of a CP type, a subcarrier spacing, and a modulation order (MCS), that is, the first device does not need to additionally notify the second device of the time domain density of the PT-RS.
  • the second device determines the time domain density of the PT-RS by at least one of a CP type, a subcarrier spacing, and a modulation order (MCS).
  • MCS modulation order
  • the symbol carrying the pre-loaded DMRS can learn the location of the second symbol by using the DMRS resource pattern (the protocol defines the DMRS resource pattern used by different antenna ports), that is, the first device does not need to additionally notify the second device of the second symbol.
  • the location of the second symbol can be determined by the second device through the antenna port of the DMRS.
  • the first device can determine according to other parameters (such as MCS, DMRS antenna port, etc.) without additional notification.
  • the symbol carrying the first reference signal (PT-RS) can significantly save signaling overhead.
  • the first device may be a terminal device, and the second device may be a network device.
  • the first device may be a network device, and the second device may be a terminal device.
  • the first device and the second device may both be terminal devices, and may also be network devices.
  • the PTRS mapping is carried on the first symbol of the data signal (PDSCH/PUSCH) in the time domain unit.
  • the PTRS maps the smallest symbol in each L symbols in the order in which the symbol index values are incremented. That is, starting from the first symbol carrying the data signal, the PT-RS can be uniformly mapped in the time domain unit.
  • L is the reciprocal of the symbol-level time domain density of the PTRS, and the value of L can be determined according to the symbol-level time domain density of the PTRS, for example, the value may be ⁇ 1, 2, 4 ⁇ .
  • the time domain unit may be a time slot, or an aggregation time slot, or a subframe, or a Transmission Time Interval (TTI) or the like.
  • TTI Transmission Time Interval
  • the index l of the symbol carrying the PT-RS can be expressed by the following formula:
  • the mapping priority of the PTRS is lower than at least one of the following: a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH), a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH), a synchronization signal (SS block), and a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS). , Sounding Reference Signal (SRS), Demodulation Reference Signal (DMRS), Physical Broadcast Channel (PBCH).
  • the mapping priority is lower than the PDCCH/PUCCH/SS block/CSI-RS/SRS/DMRS means that if the PTRS time-frequency domain mapping rule is used, the PDCCH/PUCCH/ needs to be mapped on the resource unit (RE) to which the PTRS needs to be mapped.
  • These special signals do not map PTRS on this resource unit. It can be understood that if these special signals are mapped on the symbol with the smallest index among every L symbols, the PTRS is not mapped on the REs that map these special signals. It can be understood that if all the subcarriers on one or more symbols of the PTRS to be mapped are mapped with these special signals according to the PTRS time domain mapping rule, the PTRS is not mapped on the one or more symbols.
  • the resource unit is Send zero-power PTRS (ZP-PTRS) or send silent PTRS (Muted-PTRS).
  • FIGS. 9A-9L and FIGS. 10A-10L exemplarily show schematic diagrams of the PTRS time domain mapping rules provided by this embodiment.
  • 9A-9L and FIG. 10A-10L exemplarily illustrate the mapping of PTRS time domain mapping rules according to the present embodiment, which are different DMRS configurations or different PDCCH configurations or different PDSCH configurations.
  • the preloaded DMRS is mapped on symbol 3, that is, the second symbol is symbol 3.
  • the additional DMRS is mapped on symbol 7.
  • the PDCCH and the PDSCH share the symbol 0-2 in a frequency division multiplexing manner, that is, the symbol before the pre-loaded DMRS is carried.
  • the last 5 symbols (i.e., symbols 9-13) in the time domain unit (i.e., slot) do not map PDSCH, i.e., symbols 9-13 do not carry downlink data signals.
  • the PTRS is mapped on the first symbol (i.e., symbol 0) that carries the data signal.
  • the PTRS is mapped on symbol 0, symbol 2, symbol 4, symbol 6, and symbol 8.
  • the preloaded DMRS is mapped on symbol 2, that is, the second symbol is symbol 2.
  • the additional DMRS is mapped on symbol 7.
  • the PDCCH and the PDSCH share the symbol 0-1 in a frequency division multiplexing manner, that is, the symbol before the pre-loaded DMRS is carried.
  • the last 5 symbols (i.e., symbols 9-13) in the time domain unit (i.e., slot) do not map PDSCH, i.e., symbols 9-13 do not carry downlink data signals.
  • the PT-RS is mapped on the first symbol (i.e., symbol 0) carrying the data signal.
  • the preloaded DMRS is mapped on symbol 3, that is, the second symbol is symbol 3.
  • the additional DMRS is mapped on symbol 7.
  • the PDCCH and the PDSCH share the symbol 0-2 in a frequency division multiplexing manner, that is, the symbol before the pre-loaded DMRS is carried.
  • the last 5 symbols (i.e., symbols 9-13) in the time domain unit (i.e., slot) do not map PDSCH, i.e., symbols 9-13 do not carry downlink data signals.
  • the PTRS is mapped on the first symbol (ie, symbol 0) that carries the data signal.
  • the PTRS is mapped on symbol 0, symbol 4, and symbol 8.
  • the preloaded DMRS is mapped on symbol 3, that is, the second symbol is symbol 3.
  • the additional DMRS is mapped on symbol 8.
  • the PDCCH and the PDSCH share the symbol 0-2 in a frequency division multiplexing manner, that is, the symbol before the pre-loaded DMRS is carried.
  • the last 5 symbols (i.e., symbols 9-13) in the time domain unit (i.e., slot) do not map PDSCH, i.e., symbols 9-13 do not carry downlink data signals.
  • the PT-RS is mapped on the first symbol (ie, symbol 0) carrying the data signal.
  • FIG. 9A-9L and FIG. 10A - 10L only exemplarily show some implementation manners of this embodiment.
  • resources (subcarriers and symbols) of DMRS and resources of PDCCH (subcarriers) are mapped.
  • the sum symbol), the resources (subcarriers and symbols) that map the PDSCH, and the like may also be different and should not be construed as limiting.
  • the PT-RS time domain mapping rule provided in the first embodiment maps the PTRS from the first symbol of the data channel, and ensures that the data channel before the symbol carrying the pre-loaded DMRS also has a PTRS mapping, thereby Guarantee phase noise estimation performance.
  • a mapping priority between a PTRS and a special signal such as a reference signal or a physical channel
  • when a PTRS mapping resource conflicts with a special signal such as another reference signal or a physical channel, the collision can be avoided by not mapping the PTRS.
  • the location of the symbol carrying the PTRS may be the location of the symbol carrying the pre-loaded DMRS (ie, the second symbol), and the first symbol and finally of the bearer data signal (PDSCH/PUSCH).
  • the first symbol carrying the data signal refers to a symbol having the smallest index among the symbols of the bearer data signal (PDSCH/PUSCH) in the time domain unit.
  • the last symbol carrying the data signal refers to the symbol with the largest index among the symbols of the bearer data signal (PDSCH/PUSCH) in the time domain unit.
  • the time domain unit may be a time slot, or an aggregation time slot, or a subframe, or a Transmission Time Interval (TTI) or the like.
  • TTI Transmission Time Interval
  • the PTRS may be mapped on the first symbol of the bearer data signal before the second symbol (ie, the symbol carrying the pre-loaded DMRS). Moreover, before the second symbol, in the order in which the symbol index values are incremented, the PTRS can be mapped on the symbol with the smallest index among every L symbols. That is to say, starting from the first symbol carrying the data signal, the PT-RS can be uniformly mapped on the symbol preceding the second symbol in the order in which the symbol index values are incremented.
  • L is the reciprocal of the symbol-level time domain density of the PTRS, and the value of L can be determined according to the symbol-level time domain density of the PTRS, for example, the value may be ⁇ 1, 2, 4 ⁇ .
  • the PTRS may be mapped on the last symbol of the bearer data signal after the second symbol (ie, the symbol carrying the pre-loaded DMRS). Moreover, after the second symbol, in the order in which the symbol index values are decremented, the PTRS can be mapped on the symbol with the largest index among every L symbols. That is to say, starting from the last symbol of the bearer data signal, the PT-RS can be uniformly mapped on the symbol following the second symbol in descending order of the symbol index value.
  • L is the reciprocal of the symbol-level time domain density of the PTRS, and the value of L can be determined according to the symbol-level time domain density of the PTRS, for example, the value may be ⁇ 1, 2, 4 ⁇ .
  • the index l of the symbol carrying the PT-RS can be expressed by the following formula:
  • An index indicating the first symbol of the bearer data signal (PDSCH/PUSCH), Indicates the index of the last symbol of the bearer data signal (PDSCH/PUSCH), and L represents the reciprocal of the symbol-level time domain density of the PTRS.
  • l DM-RS indicates the last symbol of the preloaded DMRS
  • l 0 indicates the first symbol of the preloaded DMRS. For example, when DMRS is one symbol, l DM-RS is equal to l 0 ; when DMRS is two symbols, l DM-RS is equal to l 0 +1.
  • FIG. 11A-11C exemplarily shows a schematic diagram of the PTRS time domain mapping rule provided by this embodiment.
  • 11A-11C exemplarily show a PTRS mapping diagram mapped by a PTRS time domain mapping rule according to the present embodiment, in which several typical different DMRS configurations or different PDCCH configurations or different PDSCH configurations are used.
  • the preloaded DMRS is mapped on symbol 1, that is, the second symbol is symbol 1.
  • the PDCCH and the PDSCH share the symbol 0 in a frequency division multiplexing manner, that is, the symbol before the pre-loaded DMRS is carried.
  • the PTRS prior to symbol 1, the PTRS is mapped on the first symbol (ie, symbol 0) that carries the data signal.
  • the PTRS is mapped on symbol 0, symbol 2-13.
  • the preloaded DMRS is mapped on symbol 1, that is, the second symbol is symbol 2.
  • the PDCCH and the PDSCH share the symbol 0 and the symbol 1 in a frequency division multiplexing manner, that is, the symbols before the pre-loaded DMRS are carried.
  • the PTRS prior to symbol 2, the PTRS is mapped on the first symbol (ie, symbol 0) carrying the data signal.
  • the PTRS is mapped on symbol 0, symbol 3, symbol 5, symbol 7, symbol 9, symbol 11, and symbol 13.
  • the preloaded DMRS is mapped on symbol 1, that is, the second symbol is symbol 3.
  • the PDCCH and the PDSCH share the symbol 0-2 in a frequency division multiplexing manner, that is, the symbol before the pre-loaded DMRS is carried.
  • the PTRS is mapped on the first symbol (ie, symbol 0) that carries the data signal.
  • the PTRS is mapped on symbol 0, symbol 5, symbol 9 and symbol 13.
  • 11A-11C exemplarily shows some implementation manners of the present embodiment.
  • resources (subcarriers and symbols) of DMRS, resources (subcarriers and symbols) mapped to PDCCH, and mapping are mapped.
  • the resources (subcarriers and symbols) of the PDSCH and the like may also be different and should not be construed as limiting.
  • the mapping priority of the PTRS is lower than at least one of the following: a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH), a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH), a synchronization signal (SS block), and a channel state information reference signal. (CSI-RS), Sounding Reference Signal (SRS), Demodulation Reference Signal (DMRS), Physical Broadcast Channel (PBCH).
  • a physical downlink control channel PUCCH
  • PUCCH physical uplink control channel
  • SS block synchronization signal
  • CSI-RS channel state information reference signal
  • SRS Sounding Reference Signal
  • DMRS Demodulation Reference Signal
  • PBCH Physical Broadcast Channel
  • the PT-RS time domain mapping rule provided in Embodiment 2 maps the PTRS from the first symbol and the last symbol of the data channel to the intermediate symbol, ensuring that the PTRS is mapped on the edge symbol of the data channel, thereby The interpolation estimation performance of the PTRS is guaranteed, and the data channel before the mapping of the pre-loaded DMRS symbol is also guaranteed to have a PTRS mapping, thereby ensuring phase noise estimation performance.
  • the location of the symbol carrying the PTRS may be related to the location of the symbol carrying the pre-loaded DMRS (ie, the second symbol).
  • the location of the symbol carrying the PTRS is also the symbol carrying the pre-loaded DMRS (ie, the second symbol)
  • the symbol index in the time domain unit is smaller than the number of symbols of the index of the first symbol carrying the pre-loaded DMRS, and the time domain.
  • the intra-unit symbol index is related to the number of symbols of the index of the last symbol of the pre-loaded DMRS.
  • the time domain unit may be a time slot, or an aggregation time slot, or a subframe, or a Transmission Time Interval (TTI) or the like.
  • TTI Transmission Time Interval
  • the index of the last symbol carrying the PTRS before the second symbol is related to the first difference.
  • the PTRS is uniformly mapped on the symbol of the bearer data signal preceding the second symbol in descending order of the symbol index.
  • the index of the symbol carrying the PTRS before the second symbol is related to the first difference.
  • the first difference (H2) is the difference between the index of the first symbol carrying the pre-loaded DMRS (l 0 ) and the index of the first symbol of the bearer data signal (PDSCH/PUSCH).
  • uniform mapping refers to uniform mapping according to PTRS time domain density 1/L.
  • L is the reciprocal of the symbol-level time domain density of the PTRS, and the value of L can be determined according to the symbol-level time domain density of the PTRS, for example, the value may be ⁇ 1, 2, 4 ⁇ .
  • the index of the first symbol carrying the PTRS after the second symbol is related to the number of symbols after the second symbol.
  • the PTRS is uniformly mapped on the symbol following the second symbol in the order in which the symbol index is incremented.
  • uniform mapping refers to uniform mapping according to PTRS time domain density 1/L.
  • L is the reciprocal of the symbol-level time domain density of the PTRS, and the value of L can be determined according to the symbol-level time domain density of the PTRS, for example, the value may be ⁇ 1, 2, 4 ⁇ .
  • the number of symbols after the second symbol can be represented by H 1 .
  • the first difference can be represented by H2.
  • the index of the first symbol carrying the pre-loaded DMRS may be represented by l 0
  • the index of the last symbol carrying the pre-loaded DMRS may be represented by l DM-RS .
  • the position of the symbol carrying the PTRS is related to H 1 , H 2 .
  • map PTRS time domains are some ways to map PTRS time domains:
  • the index is l DM-RS.
  • the PTRS is mapped on the +1 symbol.
  • the PTRS may be uniformly mapped on the symbol following the second symbol in an increasing order of the symbol index.
  • the index is l 0 -1 Map the PTRS on the symbol.
  • the PTRS may be uniformly mapped on the symbol before the second symbol in descending order of the symbol index.
  • the index is l DM-RS.
  • PTRS is mapped on the +2 symbol.
  • the PTRS may be uniformly mapped on the symbol following the second symbol in an increasing order of the symbol index.
  • the index is l 0 -2 Map the PTRS on the symbol.
  • the PTRS may be uniformly mapped on the symbol before the second symbol in descending order of the symbol index.
  • the index is PTRS is mapped on the symbol of DM-RS +4.
  • the PTRS may be uniformly mapped on the symbol following the second symbol in an increasing order of the symbol index.
  • the difference H 2 between the index of the first symbol of the bearer data signal (PDSCH/PUSCH) before the pre-loaded DMRS and the index of the first symbol of the pre-loaded DMRS is an integer multiple of 4, and the index is l 0 PTRS is mapped on the -4 symbol.
  • the PTRS may be uniformly mapped on the symbol before the second symbol in descending order of the symbol index.
  • the index is l DM-
  • the PTRS is mapped on the symbol of RS +1.
  • the PTRS may be uniformly mapped on the symbol following the second symbol in an increasing order of the symbol index.
  • the PTRS may be uniformly mapped on the symbol before the second symbol in descending order of the symbol index.
  • the index is l DM-
  • the PTRS is mapped on the symbol of RS + 2.
  • the PTRS may be uniformly mapped on the symbol following the second symbol in an increasing order of the symbol index.
  • the PTRS may be uniformly mapped on the symbol before the second symbol in descending order of the symbol index.
  • the index is l DM-
  • the PTRS is mapped on the symbol of RS + 3.
  • the PTRS may uniformly map the symbols after the second symbol in an increasing order of the symbol index.
  • the PTRS may be uniformly mapped on the symbol before the second symbol in descending order of the symbol index.
  • the index l of the symbol carrying the PT-RS can be expressed by the following formula:
  • L represents the reciprocal of the time domain symbol-level density of PTRS;
  • H 1 represents the number of symbols after the second symbol; represents H2 of the first difference;
  • l 0 indicates the index of the first symbol carrying the pre-loaded DMRS, and
  • l DM-RS indicates the index of the last symbol of the pre-loaded DMRS.
  • FIG. 12A-12D exemplarily shows a schematic diagram of the PTRS time domain mapping rule provided by this embodiment.
  • FIG. 12A-12D exemplarily show PTRS mappings mapped by the PTRS time domain mapping rules according to the present embodiment, which are exemplified in several typical different DMRS configurations or different PDCCH configurations or different PDSCH configurations.
  • the preloaded DMRS is mapped on symbol 2, that is, the second symbol is symbol 2.
  • the PDCCH and the PDSCH share the symbol 0-1 in a frequency division multiplexing manner, that is, the symbol before the pre-loaded DMRS is carried.
  • the PTRS is mapped on symbol 0.
  • the PTRS is mapped on symbol 0, symbol 3, symbol 5, symbol 7, symbol 9, symbol 11, and symbol 13.
  • the preloaded DMRS is mapped on symbol 3, that is, the second symbol is symbol 3.
  • the PDCCH and the PDSCH share the symbol 0-2 in a frequency division multiplexing manner, that is, the symbol before the pre-loaded DMRS is carried.
  • the PTRS is mapped on symbol 2.
  • the PTRS is mapped on symbol 2, symbol 5, symbol 7, symbol 9, symbol 11 and symbol 13.
  • the preloaded DMRS is mapped on symbol 1, that is, the second symbol is symbol 1.
  • the PDCCH and the PDSCH share the symbol 0 in a frequency division multiplexing manner, that is, the symbol before the pre-loaded DMRS is carried.
  • the PTRS is mapped on symbol 0.
  • the preloaded DMRS is mapped on symbol 2, that is, the second symbol is symbol 2.
  • the PDCCH and the PDSCH share the symbol 0-1 in a frequency division multiplexing manner, that is, the symbol before the pre-loaded DMRS is carried.
  • the PTRS is mapped on symbol 0.
  • resources (subcarriers and symbols) of DMRS, resources (subcarriers and symbols) mapped to PDCCH, and mapping are mapped.
  • the resources (subcarriers and symbols) of the PDSCH and the like may also be different and should not be construed as limiting.
  • the PT-RS time domain mapping rule provided in the first embodiment can be used to determine the location of the symbol carrying the DMRS and the location of the symbol carrying the PTRS, and the PTRS can be determined by using the time domain mapping pattern of the DMRS.
  • the location of the symbol saves signaling overhead.
  • the PTRS is mapped on the last symbol of the data channel to ensure the interpolation estimation performance of the PTRS, and the data channel before the symbol carrying the pre-loaded DMRS is also mapped with PTRS, thereby ensuring the phase noise estimation performance. .
  • one or more sets of data resource mapping indication (PDSCH-RE-MappingConfig) information is included in high layer signaling, such as RRC signaling, and the data resource mapping indication information includes data resources.
  • Mapping information indicating information (pdsch-RE-MappingConfigId) of the information and information about the time-frequency resource location of the PTRS, and the related information may be, for example, a pattern indicating a phase tracking reference signal (PTRS pattern) and/or an antenna port of the phase tracking reference signal ( PTRS port) and so on.
  • a specific signaling implementation is as follows:
  • the data resource mapping indication information includes identification information of the data resource mapping indication information (pdsch-RE-MappingConfigId) and related information of the time-frequency resource location of the PTRS, where the related information includes PTRS ports and/or PTRS pattern; or PTRS port group .
  • PTRS ports represent antenna port information of the PTRS (for example, the antenna port information herein includes the port number of the antenna port); PTRS pattern indicates a PTRS pattern; or PTRS port group indicates information of the PTRS antenna port group.
  • the DCI specifically indicates which group of data resource mapping indication information used by the RRC configuration.
  • the data resource mapping indication information configured in the RRC signaling may be indicated by the bits of the PDSCH RE Mapping and Quasi-Co-Location Indicator (PQI) in the DCI.
  • Identification information (for example, pdsch-RE-MappingConfigId).
  • Table 1 illustrates the data resource mapping and quasi-co-location indication fields by 2 bits.
  • Data resource mapping and quasi-co-location indication field (bit value) description 00 Identification of the data resource mapping indication information of the RRC configuration 1 01 Identification of the data resource mapping indication information of the RRC configuration 2 10 Identification of the data resource mapping indication information of the RRC configuration 3 11 Identification of the data resource mapping indication information of the RRC configuration 4
  • the data resource mapping and the quasi-co-location indication field can also be understood as a specific implementation manner of the second indication information carried by the DCI.
  • the second indication information by indicating the corresponding identifier, can further determine related information of the time-frequency resource location of the phase tracking reference signal corresponding to the identifier in the RRC.
  • the identifier information of the data resource mapping indication information is the identifier 1
  • the bit value of the data resource mapping and the quasi-co-location indication field in the DCI is “00”
  • the DCI indication identifier 1 may be determined.
  • the phase tracking information of the phase-track resource of the reference signal can further determine that the relevant information is PTRS ports ENUMERATED ⁇ 7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,spare1 ⁇ , and/or PTRS pattern ENUMERATED ⁇ pattern 1,pattern 2 ⁇ ; or PTRS port group ENUMERATED ⁇ group number 1, group number 2, ... ⁇ .
  • the receiving end ie, the second device obtains the time-frequency resource location of the PTRS in the data resource mapping indication information, that is, the data is not mapped to the time-frequency resource location of the PTRS. That is, data reception is not performed at the time-frequency resource location of the PTRS.
  • the present application further provides another signal transmission method, which can be used to transmit data of PTRS at other transmission points (TRP) in a non-coherent joint transmission (NCJT) scenario.
  • Rate matching that is, no mapping of data
  • NJT non-coherent joint transmission
  • the TM10 supports Coordination Multiple Point (CoMP).
  • CoMP Coordination Multiple Point
  • the signal may come from multiple transmission points.
  • NJT non-coherent transmission
  • different transmission points can transmit different MIMO data to the same terminal device on the same time-frequency resource. MIMO layers.
  • the signal may come from multiple transmission points (TPs) or transmission reception points (TRPs).
  • TPs transmission points
  • TRPs transmission reception points
  • the antenna ports in CoMP need to meet the QCL limit.
  • Network devices may sometimes need to configure multiple sets of QCL information to notify the terminal device.
  • NJT non-coherent joint transmission
  • different transmission points such as network devices
  • demodulation reference signal (DMRS) antenna ports (sometimes called DMRS ports) and channel state information reference at the first transmission point
  • Channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS) antenna port (sometimes called CSI-RS ports) and/or PTRS is QCL (ie, satisfying QCL relationship)
  • CSI-RS Channel state information reference signal
  • PTRS CSI- at the second transmission point
  • the RS antenna port and/or PTRS is QCL, and the antenna port between the first transmission point and the second transmission point is non-QCL (ie, does not satisfy the QCL relationship).
  • the definition of QCL in this embodiment may refer to the definition in LTE, that is, the signal sent from the antenna port of the QCL will undergo the same large-scale fading, and the large-scale fading includes one or more of the following: delay extension, Doppler Le expansion, Doppler shift, average channel gain, and average delay.
  • the definition of QCL in the embodiment of the present application can also refer to the definition of QCL in 5G.
  • the definition of QCL is similar to that of the LTE system, but the airspace information is added, for example, the signal sent from the antenna port of the QCL.
  • the airspace parameter may be a power angle spread spectrum such as an emission angle (AOA), a main emission angle (Dominant AoA), an average arrival angle (Average AoA), an angle of arrival (AOD), a channel correlation matrix, an angle of arrival, and an average trigger.
  • Angle AoD power angle spread spectrum of the departure angle, transmit channel correlation, receive channel correlation, transmit beamforming, receive beamforming, spatial channel correlation, filters, spatial filtering parameters, or spatial receive parameters, etc.
  • the QCL relationship includes a channel state information-reference signal (CSI-RS) that satisfies the QCL relationship, a DMRS, and a phase tracking reference signal (PTRS) (also referred to as a phase compensation reference signal (phase). Compensation reference signal (PCRS), or phase noise reference signal (referred to as phase noise reference signal), a synchronization block (SS block) (including one or more of a synchronization signal and a broadcast channel, the synchronization signal including the primary synchronization signal PSS and / or one or more of the synchronization signals SSS), the uplink reference signal (such as the sounding reference signal, SRS, uplink DMRS).
  • CSI-RS channel state information-reference signal
  • PTRS phase tracking reference signal
  • PCRS phase compensation reference signal
  • phase noise reference signal phase noise reference signal
  • SS block including one or more of a synchronization signal and a broadcast channel, the synchronization signal including the primary synchronization signal PSS and / or one or more of the synchronization signals S
  • the transmission point 2 transmits the data on the time-frequency resource of the PTRS
  • the transmission point 2 transmits the data
  • the return link between the multiple transmission points is a non-ideal backhaul link
  • the data transmitted by the transmission point 2 (TRP2) may interfere with the PTRS transmitted by the transmission point 1 (TRP1), thereby affecting the terminal equipment to the transmission point 1 (TRP1). Receive performance of the transmitted PTRS.
  • TRP2 transmits data on the time-frequency resource of the transmission point 2 (TRP2) transmitting PTRS
  • TRP1 the data transmitted by the transmission point 1 (TRP1) will be transmitted to the transmission point 2 (TRP2).
  • PTRS creates interference.
  • the network device 1 and the network device 2 exchange PTRS information (ie, the aforementioned first reference signal) mapping resource set.
  • the network device 2 may send the PTRS information to the network device 1 by using an X2 interface, where the PTRS information is used to determine a time-frequency resource occupied by the PTRS from the network device 2, that is, a PTRS mapping resource set of the network device 2.
  • the PTRS mapping resource set of the network device 2 refers to a time-frequency resource that the network device 2 may transmit the PTRS, but the actual network device 2 may transmit the PTRS only on some resources in the set, or the actual network device 2 does not transmit the PTRS. .
  • the network device 1 and the network device 2 need to notify each other of the respective PTRS resource mapping sets, for example, mutually inform each of the following parameters: the PTRS transmission enable information, and the PTRS antenna port associated with the DMRS Port group.
  • the network device 1 can also send the PTRS information to the network device 2 through the X2 interface, which is not limited in the present invention.
  • the network device 1 (or the network device 2) sends the first indication information to the terminal device.
  • the first indication information sent by the network device 1 (or the network device 2) is used to indicate the location of the time-frequency resources occupied by the at least two groups of PTRSs, and each group of PTRSs and other reference signals (eg, DMRS, CSI-RS, SS block, SRS) Etc.) has a set of QCL relationships, corresponding to a network device, the QCL relationship of each group of PTRS is different, that is, the PTRS group and the group are non-QCL.
  • the antenna ports in the PTRS antenna port group 1 satisfy the first QCL relationship
  • the antenna ports in the PTRS antenna port group 2 satisfy the second QCL relationship, wherein the first QCL relationship is different from the second QCL relationship.
  • the first QCL relationship may correspond to the network device 1
  • the second QCL relationship may correspond to the network device 2.
  • the other reference signal may be referred to as a third reference signal.
  • the first indication information that the network device 1 (or the network device 2) sends to the terminal device may be jointly indicated by the high layer signaling or the high layer signaling and the physical layer signaling.
  • the first indication information is RRC signaling
  • the RRC signaling includes at least two sets of data resource mapping indication (PDSCH-RE-MappingConfig) information
  • the data resource mapping indication information includes the data resource mapping indication information.
  • the identification information (pdsch-RE-MappingConfigId) and the information about the time-frequency resource location of the PRTS, the related information may be a DMRS pattern indicating a PTRS and/or an DMRS port of the PTRS, or a PTRS group identifier and many more.
  • a specific signaling implementation is as follows:
  • the content included in one of the data resource mapping indication information in the RRC signaling is displayed, where the data resource mapping indication information includes the identifier information of the data resource mapping indication information (pdsch-RE-MappingConfigId) Information about the location of the time-frequency resource of the PTRS, where the relevant information includes PTRS ports and/or PTRS pattern; or PTRS port group.
  • PTRS ports indicate antenna port information of the PTRS (for example, the antenna port information herein includes the port number of the antenna port);
  • PTRS pattern indicates the DMRS pattern; or
  • PTRS port group indicates information of the PTRS antenna port group.
  • the first indication information may also be physical layer signaling DCI and high layer signaling.
  • the physical layer signaling DCI specifically indicates which group of data resource mapping indication information used by the RRC configuration.
  • the identifier information for example, pdsch-RE-MappingConfigId
  • the data resource mapping indication information configured in the RRC signaling may be indicated by a bit mapped by the data resource in the DCI.
  • Table 2 illustrates the data resource mapping and quasi-co-location indication fields by 2 bits.
  • Data resource mapping and quasi-co-location indication field (bit value) description 00 Identification of the data resource mapping indication information of the RRC configuration 1 01 Identification of the data resource mapping indication information of the RRC configuration 2 10 Identification of the data resource mapping indication information of the RRC configuration 3 11 Identification of the data resource mapping indication information of the RRC configuration 4
  • the identifier information of the data resource mapping indication information is the identifier 1, and the bit value of the data resource mapping and the quasi-co-location indication field in the DCI is “00”, and the DCI indication identifier 1 may be determined.
  • the phase tracking information of the phase-track resource of the reference signal can further determine that the relevant information is PTRS ports ENUMERATED ⁇ 7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,spare1 ⁇ , and/or PTRS pattern ENUMERATED ⁇ pattern 1,pattern 2 ⁇ ; or PTRS port group ENUMERATED ⁇ group number 1, group number 2, ... ⁇ .
  • the receiving end acquires the time-frequency resource location of at least two groups of PTRSs in the data resource mapping indication information, that is, the data is not mapped to the time-frequency resource location of the second DMRS. That is, data is not performed on the time-frequency resource location of the second DMRS.
  • the terminal device sends the first indication information according to the network device 1 (or the network device 2), and determines the time-frequency resource location of the at least two groups of PTRSs in the resource mapping indication information, so that the data is not mapped to the second DMRS.
  • the location of the time-frequency resource That is, data is not performed on the time-frequency resource location of the second DMRS.
  • the network device 1 and the network device 2 send a data signal to the terminal device, and perform rate matching on the data signal to be sent, that is, the data signal is not mapped to the time-frequency resource location of the PTRS indicated by the first indication information.
  • the data signal is mapped to a location of other time-frequency resources than the time-frequency resource location of the PTRS indicated by the first indication information.
  • the first indication information may include first information and second information, where the first information is used to determine a subcarrier occupied by the PTRS, and second The information is used to determine the symbol occupied by the PTRS.
  • the first information may include at least one of the following: the sending enable information of the PTRS, the indication information of the DMRS port associated with the antenna port of the PTRS in the DMRS Port group, the indication information of the DMRS port group, or the frequency domain density of the PTRS. Indicates the association relationship with the scheduling bandwidth threshold.
  • the second information may include indication information of a relationship between a time domain density of the PTRS and an MCS threshold.
  • the terminal device may determine, according to the first information sent by the network device 1 (or the network device 2), the subcarrier mapping set of the PTRS of the network device 1 (the network device 2), that is, the network device 1 (or the network device) 2) A collection of subcarriers that may be occupied.
  • the set of subcarrier mappings of the PTRS of the network device 1 (or the network device 2) may include: (all possible) subcarriers at a frequency domain density corresponding to a maximum scheduling bandwidth that the network device 1 schedules to the terminal device. For the relationship between the scheduling bandwidth and the frequency domain density, refer to the description of the PTRS frequency domain density in the following content, which will not be described here.
  • the terminal device may determine, according to the second information sent by the network device 1 (or the network device 2), a symbol mapping set of the PTRS of the network device 1 (or the network device 2), that is, the network device 1 (or the network device 2) may A collection of symbols that will be occupied.
  • the symbol mapping set of the PTRS of the network device 1 (or the network device 2) may include: (all possible) subcarriers in the time domain density corresponding to the maximum MCS scheduled by the network device 1 to the terminal device. For the relationship between the MCS and the time domain density, reference may be made to the description of the PTRS time domain density in the following content, which will not be described here.
  • the network device and the terminal device perform rate matching of the foregoing PTRS.
  • the number of DCIs that need to be blindly detected by the UE or the number of DCIs that need to be blindly detected may be configured by the network device through RRC signaling to determine whether the current is an NCJT transmission, and then determine whether to use the foregoing method to rate the location of the PTRS. match.
  • whether the current NCJT transmission is currently indicated by the displayed signaling (physical layer DCI signaling or DCI signaling) determines whether the location of the PTRS is rate matched using the above method.
  • NCJT transmission is currently performed by the number of indicated QCL relationships of the DCI signaling, and further determine whether to perform rate matching on the location of the PTRS using the above method.
  • the method for determining the NCJT is not limited in this application.
  • the network device 1 and the network device 2 may also send second indication information to the terminal device respectively, and refer to S201A and S201B.
  • the second indication information sent by the network device 1 (or the network device 2) is used to indicate time-frequency resources occupied by the PTRS from the network device 1 (or the network device 2).
  • the second indication information sent by the network device 1 and the network device 2 respectively can be used to indicate the location of the time-frequency resources occupied by the at least two groups of PTRS mentioned in the embodiment of FIG. 14 .
  • the PTRS from the network device 1 and the PTRS from the network device 2 do not have a QCL relationship.
  • the time domain density of PTRS and the method of determining the frequency domain density will be described below.
  • the time domain density of the PT-RS may be related to at least one of a Cyclic Prefix (CP) type, a subcarrier spacing, and a modulation order.
  • CP Cyclic Prefix
  • the time domain density of the PT-RS is corresponding to at least one of a CP type, a subcarrier spacing, and a modulation order.
  • Different CP types or subcarrier spacing or modulation orders correspond to different time domain densities.
  • the corresponding relationship may be predefined by a protocol, or may be configured by a network device by using high layer signaling, such as RRC signaling.
  • the time domain density of the PT-RS may include the following: the PT-RS may be continuously mapped on each symbol of the PUSCH (or PDSCH), or may be on every two symbols of the PUSCH (or PDSCH). Once mapped, it can also be mapped once every 4 symbols of the PUSCH (or PDSCH).
  • the time domain density of the PT-RS can be determined according to the subcarrier spacing and the modulation order.
  • one or more modulation order thresholds may be configured by pre-defined or higher layer signaling, and all modulation orders between adjacent two modulation order thresholds Corresponding to the same PT-RS time domain density, as shown in Table 3.
  • MCS_1, MCS_2, and MCS_3 are modulation order thresholds, and "1", "1/2", and "1/4" in the time domain density refer to the three time domain densities shown in FIG. 1, respectively.
  • the time domain density of the PT-RS may be determined according to a modulation order threshold interval in which the actual modulation order MCS falls.
  • a modulation order threshold interval in which the actual modulation order MCS falls.
  • the examples are merely illustrative of the embodiments of the invention and should not be construed as limiting.
  • different subcarrier spacings may correspond to different modulation order thresholds. That is to say, for different subcarrier spacings, different correspondence tables of modulation order thresholds and time domain densities can be configured.
  • the respective modulation order thresholds of different subcarrier intervals may be predefined by a protocol, or may be configured by a network device by using high layer signaling (for example, RRC signaling).
  • high layer signaling for example, RRC signaling
  • a default subcarrier spacing (denoted as SC_1), such as 15 kHz, and one or more default thresholds corresponding to the default subcarrier spacing may be configured by protocol pre-defined or higher layer signaling. (indicated as MCS').
  • MCS_offset which is an integer
  • MCS_offset may be configured by protocol pre-defined or higher layer signaling.
  • the actual modulation order MCS plus the modulation order offset value MCS_offset may be used to determine the time domain density of the PT-RS.
  • the examples are merely illustrative of the embodiments of the invention and should not be construed as limiting.
  • the default subcarrier spacing (represented as SCS_1) may be configured by protocol pre-defined or higher layer signaling, and one or more default modulation order thresholds corresponding to the default subcarrier spacing. (indicated as MCS').
  • MCS' the default modulation order thresholds corresponding to the default subcarrier spacing.
  • the actual modulation order MCS and the default modulation order threshold MCS' may be used to determine which default modulation order threshold interval the MCS falls in, and then the default modulation order gate is utilized.
  • the time domain density corresponding to the limit interval is multiplied by the scaling factor ⁇ to determine the actual time domain density of the PT-RS.
  • the actual modulation order MCS falls within [MCS_2, MCS_3] at the non-default subcarrier spacing of 120 Hz
  • the examples are merely illustrative of the embodiments of the invention and should not be construed as limiting.
  • between at least one of the subcarrier spacing and the modulation order and the time domain density of the PT-RS may be configured by protocol pre-defined or higher layer signaling (eg, RRC signaling). Correspondence relationship.
  • the time domain density of the PT-RS may be configured by protocol pre-defined or higher layer signaling: the PT-RS is continuously mapped on each symbol of the PUSCH (or PDSCH). .
  • PT-RS can be used to assist Doppler frequency offset estimation in a high speed and large delay spread scenario.
  • the frequency domain density of the PT-RS may be related to at least one of a CP type, the user scheduling bandwidth, a subcarrier spacing, and a modulation order. That is to say, the total number of subcarriers L PT-RS mapped by the PT-RS in the user scheduling bandwidth may be related to at least one of a CP type, the user scheduling bandwidth, a subcarrier spacing, and a modulation order.
  • the frequency domain density of the PT-RS has a corresponding relationship with at least one of a CP type, the user scheduling bandwidth, a subcarrier spacing, and a modulation order.
  • a CP type the user scheduling bandwidth
  • a subcarrier spacing a subcarrier spacing
  • a modulation order Different CP types or the user scheduling bandwidth or subcarrier spacing or modulation order correspond to different frequency domain densities.
  • the corresponding relationship may be predefined by a protocol, or may be configured by a network device by using high layer signaling, such as RRC signaling.
  • one or more scheduling bandwidth thresholds may be configured by using predefined or higher layer signaling, and all scheduling bandwidths between adjacent two scheduling bandwidth thresholds correspond to the same PT.
  • -RS frequency domain density as shown in Table 5.
  • the BW_1, BW_2, BW_3, BW_4, and BW_5 are the scheduling bandwidth thresholds, and the number of resource blocks included in the scheduling bandwidth of the scheduling bandwidth threshold may be represented by the frequency domain span corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth, which is not limited herein.
  • the frequency domain density "1/2" indicates that the PT-RS occupies one subcarrier per 2 resource blocks.
  • the meanings of the frequency domain density "1/4", "1/8", and "1/16" can be analogized and will not be described again.
  • different subcarrier spacings may correspond to different scheduling bandwidth thresholds. That is to say, for different subcarrier spacings, different correspondence table between scheduling bandwidth threshold and time domain density can be configured.
  • the scheduling bandwidth threshold corresponding to each of the different subcarrier intervals may be predefined by a protocol, or may be configured by the network device by using high layer signaling (for example, RRC signaling).
  • a default subcarrier spacing (represented as SCS_1), such as 15 kHz, may be configured by protocol pre-defined or higher layer signaling, and one or more default scheduling bandwidth gates corresponding to the default subcarrier spacing. Limit (expressed as BW').
  • the actual scheduling bandwidth BW plus the scheduling bandwidth offset value BW_offset may be used to determine the frequency domain density of the PT-RS.
  • the frequency domain density of the PT-RS is 1. If the actual modulation order BW plus BW_offset falls within the interval [BW_2, BW_3], the frequency domain density of the PT-RS is 1/2.
  • a default subcarrier spacing (represented as SCS_1) may be configured by protocol pre-defined or higher layer signaling, and one or more default scheduling bandwidth thresholds corresponding to the default sub-carrier spacing ( Expressed as BW').
  • the actual scheduling bandwidth BW and the default scheduling bandwidth threshold BW' may be used to determine which default scheduling bandwidth threshold interval the BW falls in, and then the default scheduling bandwidth threshold interval is used.
  • the frequency domain density is multiplied by the scaling factor ⁇ to determine the actual frequency domain density of the PT-RS.
  • the present application also provides another signal transmission method.
  • the network device may configure the terminal device to send a sounding reference signal.
  • a sounding reference signal (SRS) is a reference signal used to measure an upstream channel.
  • the network device performs uplink channel measurement based on the SRS sent by the terminal device to obtain channel state information (CSI) of the uplink channel, so as to facilitate scheduling of uplink resources.
  • CSI channel state information
  • the network device can also obtain the downlink CSI by measuring the SRS, that is, first obtain the uplink CSI, and then determine the downlink CSI according to the channel reciprocity.
  • an SRS signal supporting a two-transmission (1T2R) terminal device is switched between different antennas.
  • the uplink transmission of the terminal device can only be transmitted by one antenna or one port at the same time, and the downlink reception can be received by two antennas. Therefore, the network device cannot obtain the downlink 2 receiving antenna based on the single antenna SRS. Channel.
  • the terminal equipment In order to obtain the channels of all downlink antennas, the terminal equipment must transmit SRSs at different times on multiple antennas, that is, SRS transmission is performed by means of SRS antenna switching.
  • Step 1 The network device sends the SRS configuration information to the terminal device.
  • the number of antenna ports indicated in the antenna port information needs to be no greater than the number of antennas that the terminal device can simultaneously perform uplink transmission.
  • the network device configures the SRS period, and the SRS period may be an absolute time, such as 1 ms, 0.5 ms, 10 ms, etc., and the network device indicates the identifier corresponding to the period by signaling. It is also possible to configure relative time, such as the number of time slots, such as 1 time slot, 2 time slots, and further, a period of less than 1, for example 0.5 time slots, can be configured to enable multiple transmissions of the SRS in one time slot.
  • the terminal device needs to report the maximum number of antennas that can be sent at the same time in message three (Msg3) or higher layer signaling, such as RRC signaling.
  • Msg3 message three
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • the network device sends signaling to the terminal device, where the signaling is used to notify the terminal device to send the SRS in the manner of SRS antenna switching, or notify the terminal device to support the antenna selection function.
  • Step 2 The terminal device transmits the SRS on the v antennas according to the configuration information of the network device, and sends the SRS by using u ports or u antennas at the same time.
  • the specific solution is as follows:
  • the identifier of the antenna can be recorded as a(n SRS ), where n SRS is determined according to the number of times the uplink reference signal is sent, or according to the frame number, subframe number, slot number, symbol number where the current SRS is located, At least one of the number of symbols of the resources of the SRS and the period of the SRS is determined, or n SRS represents a count of the SRSs transmitted this time for a period of time. For example, n SRS is the number of times or times the uplink reference signal is transmitted minus 1, or n SRS is a count of the SRS time domain position in a cycle of one frame or one frame number. For example, in LTE, n SRS is defined as:
  • N SP is the number of downlink-to-uplink handovers in a frame
  • n f is the frame number
  • n s is the slot number in the frame
  • T SRS is the period of the SRS
  • T offset is based on the symbol position and SRS in the special subframe. The number of symbols is determined
  • T offset_max is the maximum value of T offest . It can be seen that the n SRS in the calculation formula is the count of all the positions of the SRS that satisfy the SRS period in the period of 0 to 1023 of one frame number.
  • K is the total number of hops for frequency hopping.
  • the following table gives the relationship between the antenna port and the number of transmissions and the bandwidth of the transmission:
  • the terminal equipment transmits the SRS with the antennas 0 and 1 at the first frequency hopping position, and the second transmission, the terminal equipment transmits the SRS with the antennas 2 and 3 at the second frequency hopping position, and the third In the case of secondary transmission, the terminal equipment transmits the SRS with the antennas 2 and 3 at the first frequency hopping position, and the fourth transmission, the terminal equipment transmits the SRS with the antennas 0 and 1 at the second frequency hopping position.
  • the solution can be applied to the case where the u transmit antennas have 2u receive antennas, and (1) and (2) can be changed to be no frequency hopping:
  • an expression of a correspondence between a(n SRS ) and n SRS may be:
  • the value of the signaling may be RRC signaling or MAC CE signaling or DCI.
  • Scheme 2 The identifier of the antenna can be written as a(n SRS ), where n SRS can be defined in the scheme 1.
  • K is the total number of hops for frequency hopping.
  • the following table gives the relationship between the antenna port and the number of transmissions and the bandwidth of the transmission:
  • the terminal equipment transmits the SRS with the antennas 0 and 1 at the first frequency hopping position, and the second transmission, the terminal equipment transmits the SRS with the antennas 2 and 3 at the second frequency hopping position, and the third In the case of secondary transmission, the terminal equipment transmits the SRS with the antennas 2 and 3 at the first frequency hopping position, and the fourth transmission, the terminal equipment transmits the SRS with the antennas 0 and 1 at the second frequency hopping position.
  • the program of formula (8) The correspondence with a(n SRS ) can be expressed in a table or other formula, and no limitation is made here.
  • the corresponding relationship with a(n SRS ) may also be a value configured by the network device through signaling, and the signaling may be RRC signaling or MAC CE signaling or DCI.
  • the solution can be applied to the case where the u transmit antennas have 2u receive antennas, and (8) can be changed to:
  • the correspondence with a(n SRS ) can be expressed in a table or other formula, and no limitation is made here.
  • the corresponding relationship with a(n SRS ) may also be a value configured by the network device through signaling, and the signaling may be RRC signaling or MAC CE signaling or DCI.
  • the solution is not limited to the corresponding relationship between a(n SRS ) and n SRS in the above formula (6), (7).
  • the network device configures, by using SRS configuration information, multiple SRS resources for the terminal device, for example, the multiple SRS resources form one SRS resource group, where the network The device notifies the terminal device to send the SRS in the manner of SRS antenna switching, or informs the terminal device to support the antenna selection function. It can be understood as configuring the SRS resource group to transmit the SRS in an antenna switching manner.
  • At least one SRS resource in the SRS resource group is used to send the SRS by using at least one different antenna.
  • all the SRS resources in the SRS resource group may use different antennas to send the SRS.
  • the SRS resource has a corresponding relationship with the antenna for transmitting the SRS on the SRS resource.
  • one SRS resource group may include two SRS resources, and the first SRS resource corresponds to two antennas.
  • antenna 0, 1 the second SRS resource corresponds to the other two antennas, for example, antenna 2, 3.
  • the time-frequency position mapped by the SRS resource can be determined according to the determination of the transmitting antenna in the SRS antenna switching transmission scheme, for example, the above scheme 1 2, for example, when it is determined that the transmitting antenna is 0, 1, the transmitted SRS belongs to the first SRS resource, such as SRS resource 0, and when it is determined that the transmitting antenna is 2, 3, the transmitted SRS belongs to another SRS resource, For example, SRS resources 1.
  • SRS antenna switching transmission scheme can be used to determine the antenna used by the SRS, the same calculation formula can be used to determine the number of the SRS resource or the SRS resource, such as according to equation (1) ( 2)
  • the method for determining SRS resources is:
  • b(n SRS ) is an identifier or relative identifier of the SRS resource, or an identifier in the SRS resource group.
  • the n SRS is determined by the total number of times the SRS is sent on the SRS resource in the SRS resource group, or according to the frame number, the subframe number, the slot number, and the slot number of the SRS resource in the current SRS resource group.
  • the symbol number, the number of symbols of the resources of the SRS, and the period of the SRS are determined, or the n SRS represents a count of the SRSs currently transmitted in all the SRS resources in the SRS resource group for a period of time.
  • the SRS is an SRS signal on all SRS resources in the SRS resource group.
  • the n SRS is not an SRS count in one of the SRS resources in the SRS resource group, but a count of SRSs on all SRS resources in the SRS resource group.
  • the n SRS may also be an SRS count in one of the SRS resources in the SRS resource group, that is, the n SRS is determined by the number of times the SRS is sent on one SRS resource in the SRS resource group, or according to the current At least one of a frame number, a subframe number, a slot number, a symbol number, a symbol number of a resource of the SRS, and a period of the SRS of one SRS resource in the SRS resource group is determined, or n SRS indicates that the period is within a period of time The count of SRSs sent this time in one SRS resource in the SRS resource group.
  • the SRS is an SRS signal on one SRS resource in the SRS resource group.
  • the time domain and the frequency domain resource of the multiple SRS resources in the SRS resource group can be configured. Different SRS resources are used to measure the same frequency domain resource, and different SRS resources correspond to different antennas or antenna groups to implement SRS. Switch the transmit antenna between different SRS resources.
  • the SRS resource 0 is configured to correspond to the antenna 0, 1
  • the SRS resource 1 corresponds to the antenna 2, 3.
  • the SRS resource group includes SRS resource 0 and SRS resource 1, and the network device configures the SRS resource 0 and the time-frequency location of the resource 1, and indicates the SRS resource of the terminal device in the SRS resource group, or the SRS resource 0 and the SRS resource 1 Send SRS on.
  • switching between different SRS resources is implemented to implement SRS transmission between all antennas.
  • the scheme can further support antenna switching of terminal devices of u Tx (transmitting) antennas v Rx (receiving) antennas, where u>1 or v>2, and u ⁇ v.
  • FIG. 16 illustrates a wireless communication system, a terminal, and a network device.
  • the wireless communication system 10 includes a first device 400 and a second device 500.
  • the first device 400 may be the terminal 200 in the embodiment of FIG. 4, and the second device 500 may be the network device 300 in the embodiment of FIG. 5 in the uplink transmission process.
  • the first device 400 may be the network device 300 in the embodiment of FIG. 5, and the second device 500 may be the terminal 200 in the embodiment of FIG.
  • the wireless communication system 10 can be the wireless communication system 100 depicted in FIG. Described separately below.
  • the first device 400 may include a processing unit 401 and a transmitting unit 403. among them:
  • the processing unit 401 can be configured to map the first reference signal on the first symbol; the first reference signal is used for phase tracking.
  • the first symbol includes a symbol of a bearer data signal before the second symbol in the time domain unit, and the second symbol refers to a first symbol that carries the demodulation reference signal in the time domain unit, or The second symbol refers to a plurality of consecutive symbols in the time domain unit, the consecutive plurality of symbols including a first symbol carrying a demodulation reference signal;
  • the sending unit 403 can be configured to send the first reference signal to the second device 500.
  • the processing unit 401 may be configured to map the PTRS according to the PTRS time domain mapping rule according to the foregoing Embodiments 1 to 3, and may refer to the foregoing Embodiment 1 to Embodiment 3, and details are not described herein again.
  • the second device 500 may include a receiving unit 501 and a processing unit 503. among them:
  • the receiving unit 501 is configured to receive a first reference signal sent by the first device, where the first reference signal is used for phase tracking.
  • the first reference signal is mapped on the first symbol, the first symbol includes a symbol of a bearer data signal before the second symbol, and the second symbol refers to a bearer demodulation reference signal in the time domain unit.
  • the first symbol, or the second symbol refers to a plurality of consecutive symbols in the time domain unit, the consecutive plurality of symbols including a first symbol carrying a demodulation reference signal;
  • the processing unit 503 is configured to perform phase tracking by using the first reference signal.
  • FIG. 17 illustrates a wireless communication system, a terminal, and a network device.
  • the wireless communication system 20 includes a network device 600 and a terminal device 700.
  • the network device 600 may be the network device 300 in the embodiment of FIG. 5, and the terminal device 700 may be the terminal 200 in the embodiment of FIG.
  • Wireless communication system 20 may be the wireless communication system 100 depicted in FIG. Described separately below.
  • the network device 600 may include a processing unit 601 and a transmitting unit 603. among them:
  • the processing unit 601 is configured to generate first indication information, where the first indication information indicates a location of time-frequency resources occupied by at least two groups of first reference signals, and an antenna port associated with each of the at least two groups of first reference signals is not Co-located
  • the sending unit 603 is configured to send the first indication information.
  • the sending unit 603 is further configured to send a data signal, where the data signal is not mapped on a time-frequency resource occupied by the at least two sets of first reference signals.
  • the terminal device 700 may include a receiving unit 701 and a processing unit 703. among them:
  • the receiving unit 701 is configured to receive first indication information, where the first indication information indicates a location of time-frequency resources occupied by at least two groups of first reference signals, and an antenna port associated with each of the at least two groups of first reference signals is not Co-located
  • the processing unit 703 is configured to determine, according to the first indication information, a time-frequency resource occupied by the at least two groups of first reference signals;
  • the receiving unit 701 is further configured to receive a data signal, where the data signal is not mapped on a time-frequency resource occupied by the at least two groups of first reference signals.
  • each functional unit included in the terminal device 700 can be referred to the embodiment of FIG. 14 or FIG. 15 , and details are not described herein again.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic structural diagram of a device provided by the present application.
  • apparatus 80 can include a processor 801 and one or more interfaces 802 coupled to processor 801.
  • device 80 may also include a memory 803.
  • device 80 can be a chip. among them:
  • the processor 801 can be used to read and execute computer readable instructions.
  • the processor 801 can mainly include a controller, an operator, and a register.
  • the controller is mainly responsible for instruction decoding, and sends a control signal for the operation corresponding to the instruction.
  • the operator is mainly responsible for performing fixed-point or floating-point arithmetic operations, shift operations, and logic operations, as well as performing address operations and conversions.
  • the register is mainly responsible for saving the register operands and intermediate operation results temporarily stored during the execution of the instruction.
  • the hardware architecture of the processor 801 may be an Application Specific Integrated Circuits (ASIC) architecture, a MIPS architecture, an ARM architecture, or an NP architecture.
  • the processor 801 can be single core or multi-core.
  • the memory 803 can be used to store program code containing computer-readable instructions and can also be used to store input/output data of the processor 801.
  • the input/output interface 802 can be used to input data to be processed to the processor 801, and can output the processing result of the processor 801 to the outside.
  • the interface 802 can be a General Purpose Input Output (GPIO) interface, and can be connected to multiple peripheral devices (such as a display (LCD), a camera, a radio frequency module, etc.).
  • GPIO General Purpose Input Output
  • the interface 802 may also include a plurality of independent interfaces, such as an Ethernet interface, an LCD interface, a Camera interface, etc., responsible for communication between different peripheral devices and the processor 801, respectively.
  • the processor 901 can be used to invoke the implementation program of the signal transmission method provided by the embodiment of FIG. 8 on the first device side or the implementation program of the embodiment of FIG. 14 or FIG. 15 on the network device side from the memory, and execute the program. Contained instructions.
  • the interface 902 can be used to output the execution result of the processor 901.
  • processor 801 and the interface 802 can be implemented by using a hardware design or a software design, and can also be implemented by a combination of software and hardware, which is not limited herein.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic structural diagram of a device provided by the present application.
  • apparatus 90 can include a processor 901 and one or more interfaces 902 coupled to processor 901.
  • the device 90 may further include a memory 903.
  • device 90 can be a chip. among them:
  • the processor 901 can be used to read and execute computer readable instructions.
  • the processor 901 may mainly include a controller, an operator, and a register.
  • the controller is mainly responsible for instruction decoding, and sends a control signal for the operation corresponding to the instruction.
  • the operator is mainly responsible for performing fixed-point or floating-point arithmetic operations, shift operations, and logic operations, as well as performing address operations and conversions.
  • the register is mainly responsible for saving the register operands and intermediate operation results temporarily stored during the execution of the instruction.
  • the hardware architecture of the processor 901 may be an Application Specific Integrated Circuits (ASIC) architecture or the like.
  • the processor 901 can be single core or multi-core.
  • the memory 903 can be used to store program code containing computer-readable instructions and can also be used to store input/output data of the processor 901.
  • the input/output interface 902 can be used to input data to be processed to the processor 901, and can output the processing result of the processor 901 to the outside.
  • the processor 901 can be used to call the implementation program of the signal transmission method provided by the embodiment of FIG. 8 on the second device side from the memory or the implementation program of the embodiment of FIG. 14 or FIG. 15 on the terminal device side, and execute the program. Contained instructions.
  • the interface 902 can be used to output the execution result of the processor 901.
  • processor 901 and the interface 902 can be implemented by using a hardware design or a software design, and can also be implemented by a combination of software and hardware, which is not limited herein.
  • the implementation of the technical solution provided by the present application ensures that the data channel mapped on the symbol before the DMRS also has a PT-RS mapping, thereby ensuring phase noise estimation performance.
  • the program can be stored in a computer readable storage medium, when the program is executed
  • the flow of the method embodiments as described above may be included.
  • the foregoing storage medium includes various media that can store program codes, such as a ROM or a random access memory RAM, a magnetic disk, or an optical disk.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Power Engineering (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

Disclosed in an embodiment of the present invention is a signal transmission method. The method comprises: a first device sends to a second device a first reference signal, the first reference signal being used for phase tracking; and the first reference signal is mapped to a first symbol, wherein the first symbol comprises a symbol carrying a data signal in front of a second symbol, the second symbol indicating at least one successive symbol carrying a DMRS, and the at least one symbol comprises a first symbol carrying the DMRS. The method of the present invention can ensure the presence of phase tracking reference signal (PT-RS) mapping in a data channel mapped to a symbol in front of a DMRS, thus ensuring phase noise estimation performance.

Description

信号传输方法、装置及系统Signal transmission method, device and system 技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及无线通信技术领域,尤其涉及信号传输方法、装置及系统。The present application relates to the field of wireless communication technologies, and in particular, to a signal transmission method, apparatus, and system.
背景技术Background technique
随着移动互联网技术的发展,通信速率和容量需求日益增长,现有低频谱资源愈发紧张,已难以满足需求,因此频谱资源丰富的高频无线资源成为无线通信的研究热点。在无线通信系统中,频率器件即本地振荡器是非理想的,本地振荡器的随机抖动导致输出的载波信号会带有相位噪声。相位噪声的大小和载波频率有直接关系:相噪功率按20log(n)变化,n为频率增大倍数,即载波频率每增大一倍,相噪功率增大6dB。因此,对于高频无线通信而言,相噪影响不可忽略。第三代合作伙伴计划3GPP(The 3rd Generation Partnership Project)在未来演进无线系统新空口(New Radio,NR)中,已经将高频纳入到采用的频谱范围中,因此相位噪声相关影响也需要纳入到设计的考虑范围内。With the development of mobile Internet technology, the communication rate and capacity demand are increasing, and the existing low-spectrum resources are becoming more and more tense, which has been difficult to meet the demand. Therefore, the high-frequency wireless resources rich in spectrum resources have become the research hotspot of wireless communication. In a wireless communication system, the frequency device, the local oscillator, is non-ideal, and the random jitter of the local oscillator causes the output carrier signal to carry phase noise. The phase noise is directly related to the carrier frequency: the phase noise power varies by 20 log(n), and n is the frequency multiplier, that is, the doubling of the carrier frequency increases the phase noise power by 6 dB. Therefore, for high frequency wireless communication, the phase noise effect cannot be ignored. The 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) has included high-frequency into the spectrum range adopted in the future evolution of the new wireless radio network (NR), so the phase noise-related impact needs to be included. Design considerations.
相位噪声估计最常使用的方法是利用插入的相位跟踪参考信号(phase tracking reference signal,PT-RS)来估计相位误差。目前新空口(new radio,NR)已经支持多种PT-RS的符号级的时域密度。如图1所示,在时域上,PT-RS可以连续映射在PUSCH(或PDSCH)的每个符号上(即图中所示的“1时域密度”),也可以在PUSCH(或PDSCH)的每2个符号上映射一次(即图中所示的“1/2时域密度”),还可以在PUSCH(或PDSCH)的每4个符号上映射一次(即图中所示的“1/4时域密度”)。The most commonly used method for phase noise estimation is to estimate the phase error using an inserted phase tracking reference signal (PT-RS). At present, new radio (NR) has supported the symbol-level time domain density of various PT-RSs. As shown in FIG. 1, in the time domain, the PT-RS may be continuously mapped on each symbol of the PUSCH (or PDSCH) (ie, "1 time domain density" shown in the figure), or may be on the PUSCH (or PDSCH). Mapped once every 2 symbols (ie, "1/2 time domain density" shown in the figure), and can also be mapped once every 4 symbols of the PUSCH (or PDSCH) (ie, as shown in the figure) 1/4 time domain density").
在NR通信技术标准的进一步讨论中,3GPP工作组已经针对以下提议达成一致:In a further discussion of NR communication technology standards, the 3GPP Working Group has agreed on the following proposals:
物理下行控制信道(physical downlink control channel,PDCCH)和物理下行共享信道(physical downlink shared channel,PDSCH)可以通过频分的方式在同一个符号上发送,这样会导致在解调参考信号(Demodulation Reference Signal,DMRS)之前的符号上也映射有PDSCH。例如,如图2所示,DMRS映射在符号3、4上,PDCCH映射在符号0,1上,PDSCH也映射在符号0,1上。The physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) and the physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) can be transmitted on the same symbol by frequency division, which results in demodulation reference signal (Demodulation Reference Signal). PDSCH is also mapped on the symbol before DMRS). For example, as shown in FIG. 2, the DMRS is mapped on symbols 3, 4, the PDCCH is mapped on symbols 0, 1, and the PDSCH is also mapped on symbols 0, 1.
此外,DMRS的时域符号位置与PDCCH的符号数目目前并没有确定的绑定关系,这样同样会导致在DMRS之前的符号上会映射有PDSCH。例如,如图2所示,在符号2上映射有PDSCH,映射在DMRS的符号之前。In addition, there is currently no determined binding relationship between the time domain symbol position of the DMRS and the symbol number of the PDCCH, which also causes the PDSCH to be mapped on the symbols before the DMRS. For example, as shown in FIG. 2, a PDSCH is mapped on symbol 2, and is mapped before the symbol of the DMRS.
但是,如图1所示的已有PT-RS的符号映射方案均考虑将PT-RS映射的起始符号定为DMRS符号后面的符号,只能用来估计映射在DMRS符号之后的数据信道的相位噪声。However, the symbol mapping scheme of the existing PT-RS as shown in FIG. 1 considers that the starting symbol of the PT-RS mapping is a symbol following the DMRS symbol, and can only be used to estimate the data channel mapped after the DMRS symbol. Phase noise.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请提供了一种信号传输方法、装置及系统,可确保映射在DMRS之前的符号上的数据信道也会有PT-RS映射,从而保证相噪估计性能。The present application provides a signal transmission method, apparatus and system, which can ensure that a data channel mapped on a symbol before a DMRS also has a PT-RS mapping, thereby ensuring phase noise estimation performance.
第一方面,本申请提供了一种信号传输方法,应用于第一设备侧(即发送端),该方法包括:第一设备向第二设备发送第一参考信号,第一参考信号用于相位跟踪。其中,第一参考信号映射在第一符号上,所述第一符号包括时域单元内第二符号之前的承载数据信 号的符号,所述第二符号是指所述时域单元内承载解调参考信号的第1个符号,或所述第二符号是指所述时域单元内连续的多个符号,所述连续的多个符号包括承载解调参考信号的第一个符号。In a first aspect, the present application provides a signal transmission method, which is applied to a first device side (ie, a transmitting end), the method includes: the first device sends a first reference signal to a second device, where the first reference signal is used for phase track. The first reference signal is mapped on the first symbol, the first symbol includes a symbol of a bearer data signal before the second symbol in the time domain unit, and the second symbol refers to a bearer demodulation in the time domain unit. The first symbol of the reference signal, or the second symbol, refers to a plurality of consecutive symbols within the time domain unit, the consecutive plurality of symbols including a first symbol carrying a demodulation reference signal.
第二方面,本申请提供了一种信号传输方法,应用于第二设备侧(即接收端),该方法包括:第二设备接收第一设备发送的第一参考信号。其中,第一参考信号映射在第一符号上,所述第一符号包括时域单元内第二符号之前的承载数据信号的符号,所述第二符号是指所述时域单元内承载解调参考信号的第1个符号,或所述第二符号是指所述时域单元内连续的多个符号,所述连续的多个符号包括承载解调参考信号的第一个符号。In a second aspect, the present application provides a signal transmission method, which is applied to a second device side (ie, a receiving end). The method includes: receiving, by a second device, a first reference signal sent by the first device. The first reference signal is mapped on the first symbol, the first symbol includes a symbol of a bearer data signal before the second symbol in the time domain unit, and the second symbol refers to a bearer demodulation in the time domain unit. The first symbol of the reference signal, or the second symbol, refers to a plurality of consecutive symbols within the time domain unit, the consecutive plurality of symbols including a first symbol carrying a demodulation reference signal.
本申请中,第二符号即承载前载DMRS的符号。第一参考信号即PTRS。In the present application, the second symbol is a symbol carrying the pre-loaded DMRS. The first reference signal is PTRS.
实施第一方面和第二方面描述的信号传输方法,可确保映射在DMRS之前的符号上的数据信道也会有PT-RS映射,从而保证相噪估计性能。Implementing the signal transmission methods described in the first aspect and the second aspect ensures that the data channel mapped on the symbols preceding the DMRS also has PT-RS mapping, thereby ensuring phase noise estimation performance.
结合第一方面或第二方面,PT-RS的映射可包括以下两部分:In combination with the first aspect or the second aspect, the mapping of the PT-RS may include the following two parts:
1.第二符号(承载前载DMRS的符号)之前的承载数据信号的符号上的PT-RS映射。1. PT-RS mapping on the symbol of the bearer data signal before the second symbol (the symbol carrying the pre-loaded DMRS).
2.第二符号(承载前载DMRS的符号)之后的承载数据信号的符号上的PT-RS映射。2. PT-RS mapping on the symbol of the bearer data signal following the second symbol (the symbol carrying the pre-loaded DMRS).
这里,第二符号之前的符号是指索引小于第二符号的索引的符号,第二符号之后的符号是指索引大于第二符号的索引的符号。Here, the symbol before the second symbol refers to the symbol whose index is smaller than the index of the second symbol, and the symbol after the second symbol refers to the symbol whose index is larger than the index of the second symbol.
(1)在第二符号之前的符号上的PT-RS时域映射规则(1) PT-RS time domain mapping rule on symbols before the second symbol
第一种映射规则,PT-RS可以映射在第二符号之前的承载数据信号的第一个符号上。也即是说,从数据信道(PUSCH/PDSCH)的第一个符号开始映射PT-RS。这样可确保第二符号之前的符号上的数据信道也会有PT-RS映射,从而保证相噪估计性能。The first mapping rule, the PT-RS can be mapped on the first symbol of the bearer data signal preceding the second symbol. That is to say, the PT-RS is mapped starting from the first symbol of the data channel (PUSCH/PDSCH). This ensures that the data channel on the symbol before the second symbol also has a PT-RS mapping, thereby ensuring phase noise estimation performance.
第二种映射规则,在第二符号之前,用于承载PT-RS的符号的索引与第一差值有关,第一差值(H2)为承载DMRS的第一个符号的索引(l 0)和承载数据信号的第一个符号的索引的差值。即,在所述第二符号之前,用于承载PT-RS的符号的索引与第二符号之前的符号个数相关。 The second mapping rule, before the second symbol, the index of the symbol used to carry the PT-RS is related to the first difference, and the first difference (H2) is the index (l 0 ) of the first symbol carrying the DMRS. The difference from the index of the first symbol carrying the data signal. That is, before the second symbol, the index of the symbol used to carry the PT-RS is related to the number of symbols before the second symbol.
(2)在第二符号之后的符号上的PT-RS时域映射规则(2) PT-RS time domain mapping rule on the symbol after the second symbol
第一种映射规则,在第二符号之后,PT-RS所映射的起始符号的索引可以由PT-RS的时域密度确定。且按照符号索引值递增的顺序,每L个符号中索引最小的符号上映射有PT-RS。L是PT-RS的时域密度的倒数。The first mapping rule, after the second symbol, the index of the starting symbol mapped by the PT-RS may be determined by the time domain density of the PT-RS. And in the order in which the symbol index values are incremented, the PT-RS is mapped on the symbol with the smallest index among every L symbols. L is the reciprocal of the time domain density of the PT-RS.
具体的,PT-RS的时域密度可以和CP类型、子载波间隔、调制阶数中至少一项相关,可参见后面内容,这里不赘述。具体的,PT-RS的时域密度,以及PT-RS的时域密度和PT-RS所映射的起始符号的索引之间的映射关系可以由协议预定义,也可以由网络设备通过高层信令(如RRC信令)或者PDCCH配置。Specifically, the time domain density of the PT-RS may be related to at least one of a CP type, a subcarrier spacing, and a modulation order. For details, refer to the following content, and details are not described herein. Specifically, the time domain density of the PT-RS, and the mapping relationship between the time domain density of the PT-RS and the index of the start symbol mapped by the PT-RS may be predefined by a protocol, or may be passed by the network device through a high layer letter. Order (such as RRC signaling) or PDCCH configuration.
第二种映射规则,PT-RS可以均匀映射在整个时域符号(包括第二符号、第二符号之前的符号和第二符号之后的符号)上。这样,PT-RS也均匀映射在第二符号之后的符号上。可选的,PT-RS的映射优先级低于PDCCH或PUCCH或SS block或CSI-RS或SRS等等。In the second mapping rule, the PT-RS can be uniformly mapped over the entire time domain symbol (including the second symbol, the symbol before the second symbol and the symbol after the second symbol). Thus, the PT-RS is also uniformly mapped on the symbol following the second symbol. Optionally, the mapping priority of the PT-RS is lower than the PDCCH or the PUCCH or the SS block or the CSI-RS or the SRS.
第三种映射规则,PT-RS映射在第二符号之后的承载数据信号的最后一个符号上,且按照符号索引值递减的顺序,均匀映射在第二符号之后的符号上。A third mapping rule, the PT-RS is mapped on the last symbol of the bearer data signal after the second symbol, and uniformly mapped on the symbol following the second symbol in descending order of the symbol index value.
第四种映射规则,在第二符号之后,用于承载PT-RS的符号的索引与第二符号之后的符号个数相关。A fourth mapping rule, after the second symbol, the index of the symbol used to carry the PT-RS is related to the number of symbols after the second symbol.
结合第一方面或第二方面,基于上述PT-RS时域映射规则,在实施例一中,PTRS映射 在时域单元内承载数据信号(PDSCH/PUSCH)的第1个符号上。可选的,在时域单元内,按照符号索引值递增的顺序,PTRS映射在每L个符号中索引最小的符号上。即从承载数据信号的第1个符号开始,PT-RS可以均匀映射在时域单元内。L是PTRS的符号级时域密度的倒数,L的取值可以根据PTRS的符号级时域密度确定,例如可能取值为{1,2,4}。In combination with the first aspect or the second aspect, based on the PT-RS time domain mapping rule, in the first embodiment, the PTRS mapping carries the first symbol of the data signal (PDSCH/PUSCH) in the time domain unit. Optionally, in the time domain unit, the PTRS maps the smallest symbol in each L symbols in the order in which the symbol index values are incremented. That is, starting from the first symbol carrying the data signal, the PT-RS can be uniformly mapped in the time domain unit. L is the reciprocal of the symbol-level time domain density of the PTRS, and the value of L can be determined according to the symbol-level time domain density of the PTRS, for example, the value may be {1, 2, 4}.
结合第一方面或第二方面,基于上述PT-RS时域映射规则,在实施例二中,在时域单元内,承载PTRS的符号的位置可以与承载前载DMRS的符号(即第二符号)的位置,以及承载数据信号(PDSCH/PUSCH)的第1个符号和最后一个符号有关。这里,承载数据信号的第1个符号是指时域单元内承载数据信号(PDSCH/PUSCH)的符号中索引最小的符号。承载数据信号的最后一个符号是指时域单元内承载数据信号(PDSCH/PUSCH)的符号中索引最大的符号。With reference to the first aspect or the second aspect, based on the foregoing PT-RS time domain mapping rule, in the second embodiment, in the time domain unit, the location of the symbol carrying the PTRS may be the symbol carrying the pre-loaded DMRS (ie, the second symbol) The position of the ) and the first symbol of the bearer data signal (PDSCH/PUSCH) are related to the last symbol. Here, the first symbol carrying the data signal refers to a symbol having the smallest index among the symbols of the bearer data signal (PDSCH/PUSCH) in the time domain unit. The last symbol carrying the data signal refers to the symbol with the largest index among the symbols of the bearer data signal (PDSCH/PUSCH) in the time domain unit.
具体的,在时域单元内,从承载数据信号的第1个符号开始,PT-RS可以按照符号索引值递增的顺序,均匀映射在第二符号之前的符号上。在时域单元内,从承载数据信号的最后1个符号开始,PT-RS可以按照符号索引值递减的顺序,均匀映射在第二符号之后的符号上。Specifically, in the time domain unit, starting from the first symbol carrying the data signal, the PT-RS may be uniformly mapped on the symbol before the second symbol in the order of increasing symbol index values. In the time domain unit, starting from the last symbol of the bearer data signal, the PT-RS may be uniformly mapped on the symbol following the second symbol in descending order of the symbol index value.
结合第一方面或第二方面,基于上述PT-RS时域映射规则,在实施例三中,承载PTRS的符号的位置可以与承载前载DMRS的符号(即第二符号)的位置有关。可选地,承载PTRS的符号的位置还与承载前载DMRS的符号(即第二符号)、时域单元内符号索引小于承载前载DMRS的第1个符号的索引的符号个数、时域单元内符号索引大于前载DMRS的最后1个符号的索引的符号个数有关。In combination with the first aspect or the second aspect, based on the foregoing PT-RS time domain mapping rule, in Embodiment 3, the location of the symbol carrying the PTRS may be related to the location of the symbol carrying the pre-loaded DMRS (ie, the second symbol). Optionally, the location of the symbol carrying the PTRS is also the symbol carrying the pre-loaded DMRS (ie, the second symbol), the symbol index in the time domain unit is smaller than the number of symbols of the index of the first symbol carrying the pre-loaded DMRS, and the time domain. The intra-unit symbol index is related to the number of symbols of the index of the last symbol of the pre-loaded DMRS.
在实施例三中,具体的,在时域单元内,在第二符号之前的承载PTRS的最后一个符号的索引与第一差值相关。而且,从承载PTRS的最后一个符号的索引开始,PTRS按照符号索引递减的顺序,均匀映射在第二符号之前的承载数据信号的符号上。具体的,在时域单元内,在第二符号之后的承载PTRS的第1个符号的索引与第二符号之后的符号个数相关。而且,从承载PTRS的第一个符号的索引开始,PTRS按照符号索引递增的顺序,均匀映射在第二符号之后的符号上。In the third embodiment, specifically, in the time domain unit, the index of the last symbol carrying the PTRS before the second symbol is related to the first difference. Moreover, starting from the index of the last symbol carrying the PTRS, the PTRS is uniformly mapped on the symbol of the bearer data signal preceding the second symbol in descending order of the symbol index. Specifically, in the time domain unit, the index of the first symbol carrying the PTRS after the second symbol is related to the number of symbols after the second symbol. Moreover, starting from the index of the first symbol carrying the PTRS, the PTRS is uniformly mapped on the symbol following the second symbol in the order in which the symbol index is incremented.
在实施例三中,可选的,当PTRS的时域密度为1/2,即L=2时,若位于前载DMRS之后的承载数据信号(PDSCH/PUSCH)的最后1个符号的索引与承载前载DMRS的最后1个符号的索引的差值H 1为奇数,则在索引为l DM-RS+1的符号上映射PTRS。可选的,从索引为l DM-RS+1的符号开始,PTRS可以按照符号索引递增的顺序,均匀映射在第二符号之后的符号上。若位于前载DMRS之前的承载数据信号(PDSCH/PUSCH)的第1个符号的索引与承载前载DMRS的第1个符号的索引的差值H 2为奇数,则在索引为l 0-1的符号上映射PTRS。可选的,从索引为l 0-1的符号开始,PTRS可以按照符号索引递减的顺序,均匀映射在第二符号之前的符号上。 In the third embodiment, optionally, when the time domain density of the PTRS is 1/2, that is, L=2, if the index of the last symbol of the bearer data signal (PDSCH/PUSCH) after the preloaded DMRS is The difference H 1 of the index of the last symbol carrying the pre-loaded DMRS is an odd number, and the PTRS is mapped on the symbol with the index l DM-RS +1. Optionally, starting from a symbol with an index of l DM-RS +1, the PTRS may be uniformly mapped on the symbol following the second symbol in an increasing order of the symbol index. If the difference H 2 between the index of the first symbol of the bearer data signal (PDSCH/PUSCH) before the pre-loaded DMRS and the index of the first symbol of the pre-loaded DMRS is an odd number, the index is l 0 -1 Map the PTRS on the symbol. Optionally, starting from a symbol with an index of l 0 -1, the PTRS may be uniformly mapped on the symbol before the second symbol in descending order of the symbol index.
在实施例三中,可选的,当PTRS的时域密度为1/2,即L=2时,若位于前载DMRS之后的承载数据信号(PDSCH/PUSCH)的最后1个符号的索引与承载前载DMRS的最后1个符号的索引的差值H 1为偶数,则在索引为l DM-RS+2的符号上映射PTRS。可选的,从索引为l DM-RS+2的符号开始,PTRS可以按照符号索引递增的顺序,均匀映射在第二符号之后的符号上。若位于前载DMRS之前的承载数据信号(PDSCH/PUSCH)的第1个符号的索引与承载前载DMRS的第1个符号的索引的差值H 2为偶数,则在索引为l 0-2的符号上映射PTRS。可选的,从索引为l 0-2的符号开始,PTRS可以按照符号索引递减的顺序, 均匀映射在第二符号之前的符号上。 In the third embodiment, optionally, when the time domain density of the PTRS is 1/2, that is, L=2, if the index of the last symbol of the bearer data signal (PDSCH/PUSCH) after the preloaded DMRS is The difference H 1 of the index of the last symbol carrying the pre-loaded DMRS is an even number, and the PTRS is mapped on the symbol with the index l DM-RS +2. Optionally, starting from a symbol with an index of l DM-RS +2, the PTRS may be uniformly mapped on the symbol following the second symbol in an increasing order of the symbol index. If the difference H 2 between the index of the first symbol of the bearer data signal (PDSCH/PUSCH) before the pre-loaded DMRS and the index of the first symbol of the pre-loaded DMRS is even, the index is l 0 -2 Map the PTRS on the symbol. Optionally, starting from a symbol with an index of l 0 -2, the PTRS may be evenly mapped on the symbol before the second symbol in descending order of the symbol index.
在实施例三中,可选的,当PTRS的时域密度为1/4,即L=4时,若位于前载DMRS之后的承载数据信号(PDSCH/PUSCH)的最后1个符号的索引与承载前载DMRS的最后1个符号的索引的差值H 1是4的整数倍,则在索引为l DM-RS+4的符号上映射PTRS。可选的,从索引为l DM-RS+4的符号开始,PTRS可以按照符号索引递增的顺序,均匀映射在第二符号之后的符号上。位于前载DMRS之前的承载数据信号(PDSCH/PUSCH)的第1个符号的索引与承载前载DMRS的第1个符号的索引的差值H 2为4的整数倍,则在索引为l 0-4的符号上映射PTRS。可选的,从索引为l 0-4的符号开始,PTRS可以按照符号索引递减的顺序,均匀映射在第二符号之前的符号上。 In the third embodiment, optionally, when the time domain density of the PTRS is 1/4, that is, L=4, if the index of the last symbol of the bearer data signal (PDSCH/PUSCH) after the preloaded DMRS is The difference H 1 of the index of the last symbol carrying the pre-loaded DMRS is an integer multiple of 4, and the PTRS is mapped on the symbol with the index l DM-RS +4. Optionally, starting from a symbol with an index of l DM-RS +4, the PTRS may be uniformly mapped on the symbol following the second symbol in an increasing order of the symbol index. The difference H 2 between the index of the first symbol of the bearer data signal (PDSCH/PUSCH) before the pre-loaded DMRS and the index of the first symbol of the pre-loaded DMRS is an integer multiple of 4, and the index is l 0 PTRS is mapped on the -4 symbol. Optionally, starting from a symbol with an index of l 0 -4, the PTRS may be uniformly mapped on the symbol before the second symbol in descending order of the symbol index.
在实施例三中,可选的,当PTRS的时域密度为1/4,即L=4时,若位于前载DMRS之后的承载数据信号(PDSCH/PUSCH)的最后1个符号的索引与承载前载DMRS的最后1个符号的索引的差值H 1mod4=1,则在索引为l DM-RS+1的符号上映射PTRS。可选的,从索引为l DM-RS+4的符号开始,PTRS可以按照符号索引递增的顺序,均匀映射在第二符号之后的符号上。位于前载DMRS之前的承载数据信号(PDSCH/PUSCH)的第1个符号的索引与承载前载DMRS的第1个符号的索引的差值H 2mod4=2,则在索引为l 0-1的符号上映射PTRS。可选的,从索引为l 0-1的符号开始,PTRS可以按照符号索引递减的顺序,均匀映射在第二符号之前的符号上。 In the third embodiment, optionally, when the time domain density of the PTRS is 1/4, that is, L=4, if the index of the last symbol of the bearer data signal (PDSCH/PUSCH) after the preloaded DMRS is The difference H 1 mod4=1 of the index of the last symbol of the pre-loaded DMRS is mapped, and the PTRS is mapped on the symbol with the index l DM-RS +1. Optionally, starting from a symbol with an index of l DM-RS +4, the PTRS may be uniformly mapped on the symbol following the second symbol in an increasing order of the symbol index. The difference between the index of the first symbol of the bearer data signal (PDSCH/PUSCH) before the pre-loaded DMRS and the index of the first symbol of the pre-loaded DMRS is H 2 mod4=2, and the index is l 0 -1 Map the PTRS on the symbol. Optionally, starting from a symbol with an index of l 0 -1, the PTRS may be uniformly mapped on the symbol before the second symbol in descending order of the symbol index.
在实施例三中,可选的,当PTRS的时域密度为1/4,即L=4时,若位于前载DMRS之后的承载数据信号(PDSCH/PUSCH)的最后1个符号的索引与承载前载DMRS的最后1个符号的索引的差值H 1mod4=2,则在索引为l DM-RS+2的符号上映射PTRS。可选的,从索引为l DM-RS+2的符号开始,PTRS可以按照符号索引递增的顺序,均匀映射在第二符号之后的符号上。位于前载DMRS之前的承载数据信号(PDSCH/PUSCH)的第1个符号的索引与承载前载DMRS的第1个符号的索引的差值H 2mod4=2,则在索引为l 0-2的符号上映射PTRS。可选的,从索引为l 0-2的符号开始,PTRS可以按照符号索引递减的顺序,均匀映射在第二符号之前的符号上。 In the third embodiment, optionally, when the time domain density of the PTRS is 1/4, that is, L=4, if the index of the last symbol of the bearer data signal (PDSCH/PUSCH) after the preloaded DMRS is The difference H 1 mod4=2 of the index of the last symbol of the pre-loaded DMRS is carried, and the PTRS is mapped on the symbol with the index l DM-RS +2. Optionally, starting from a symbol with an index of l DM-RS +2, the PTRS may be uniformly mapped on the symbol following the second symbol in an increasing order of the symbol index. The difference between the index of the first symbol of the bearer data signal (PDSCH/PUSCH) before the pre-loaded DMRS and the index of the first symbol of the pre-loaded DMRS is H 2 mod4=2, and the index is l 0 -2 Map the PTRS on the symbol. Optionally, starting from a symbol with an index of l 0 -2, the PTRS may be uniformly mapped on the symbol before the second symbol in descending order of the symbol index.
在实施例三中,可选的,当PTRS的时域密度为1/4,即L=4时,若位于前载DMRS之后的承载数据信号(PDSCH/PUSCH)的最后1个符号的索引与承载前载DMRS的最后1个符号的索引的差值H 1mod4=3,则在索引为l DM-RS+3的符号上映射PTRS。可选的,从索引为l DM-RS+3的符号开始,PTRS可以按照符号索引递增的顺序,均匀映射在第二符号之后的符号上。位于前载DMRS之前的承载数据信号(PDSCH/PUSCH)的第1个符号的索引与承载前载DMRS的第1个符号的索引的差值H 2mod4=3,则在索引为l 0-3的符号上映射PTRS。可选的,从索引为l 0-3的符号开始,PTRS可以按照符号索引递减的顺序,均匀映射在第二符号之前的符号上。 In the third embodiment, optionally, when the time domain density of the PTRS is 1/4, that is, L=4, if the index of the last symbol of the bearer data signal (PDSCH/PUSCH) after the preloaded DMRS is The difference H 1 mod4=3 of the index of the last symbol carrying the pre-loaded DMRS is mapped to the PTRS on the symbol with the index l DM-RS +3. Optionally, starting from a symbol with an index of l DM-RS +3, the PTRS may uniformly map the symbols after the second symbol in an increasing order of the symbol index. The difference between the index of the first symbol of the bearer data signal (PDSCH/PUSCH) before the pre-loaded DMRS and the index of the first symbol of the pre-loaded DMRS is H 2 mod4=3, and the index is l 0 -3 Map the PTRS on the symbol. Optionally, starting from a symbol with an index of l 0 -3, the PTRS may be uniformly mapped on the symbol before the second symbol in descending order of the symbol index.
在实施例三中,承载PT-RS的符号的索引l可以通过下述公式表示:In the third embodiment, the index l of the symbol carrying the PT-RS can be expressed by the following formula:
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000001
或者,or,
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000002
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000002
其中,l'是正整数,l′=0,1,2,…;L表示PTRS的符号级时域密度的倒数;H 1表示第二符号之后的符号个数;H2表示前述第一差值;l 0表示承载前载DMRS的第1个符号的索引,l DM-RS表示承载前载DMRS的最后1个符号的索引。 Wherein, l 'is a positive integer, l' = 0,1,2, ...; L represents the reciprocal of the time domain symbol-level density of PTRS; H 1 represents the number of symbols after the second symbol; represents H2 of the first difference; l 0 indicates the index of the first symbol carrying the pre-loaded DMRS, and l DM-RS indicates the index of the last symbol of the pre-loaded DMRS.
结合第一方面或第二方面,在一些可选的实施例中,相位跟踪参考信号(PT-RS)的映射优先级可以低于以下至少一项:物理下行控制信道(PDCCH)、物理上行控制信道(physical uplink control channel,PUCCH)、同步信号块(synchronize signal block,SS block)、估计信道状态信息参考信号(channel state information reference signal,CSI-RS)、探测参考信号(Sounding Reference Signal,SRS)、解调参考信号(DMRS)等。也即是说,PT-RS不映射在需要映射上述任意一种信号的资源上。这样,通过确立PT-RS与其他参考信号、物理信道的映射优先级,在PT-RS与其他参考信号、物理信道发生资源冲突时,可通过不映射PT-RS的方式避免冲突。With reference to the first aspect or the second aspect, in some optional embodiments, the mapping priority of the phase tracking reference signal (PT-RS) may be lower than at least one of the following: a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH), physical uplink control Physical uplink control channel (PUCCH), synchronize signal block (SS block), channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS), and sounding reference signal (SRS) , demodulation reference signal (DMRS), etc. That is to say, the PT-RS is not mapped on a resource that needs to map any of the above signals. In this way, by establishing a mapping priority between the PT-RS and other reference signals and physical channels, when a resource conflict occurs between the PT-RS and other reference signals and physical channels, the collision can be avoided by not mapping the PT-RS.
第三方面,本申请提供了一种信号传输方法,应用于网络设备侧,该方法包括:网络设备发送第一指示信息。这里,第一指示信息指示至少2组第一参考信号占用的时频资源的位置,至少2组第一参考信号各自关联的天线端口不是准共址的。然后,网络设备发送数据信号,数据信号不映射在至少2组第一参考信号占用的时频资源上。In a third aspect, the present application provides a signal transmission method, which is applied to a network device side, and includes: the network device sends first indication information. Here, the first indication information indicates the location of the time-frequency resource occupied by the at least two groups of the first reference signals, and the antenna ports associated with each of the at least two groups of the first reference signals are not quasi-co-located. Then, the network device sends a data signal, and the data signal is not mapped on the time-frequency resources occupied by the at least two sets of first reference signals.
第四方面,本申请提供了一种信号传输方法,应用于终端设备侧,该方法包括:终端设备接收第一指示信息,第一指示信息指示至少2组第一参考信号占用的时频资源的位置,至少2组第一参考信号各自关联的天线端口不是准共址的。然后,终端设备根据第一指示信息确定至少2组第一参考信号占用的时频资源。终端设备接收数据信号,数据信号不映射在至少2组第一参考信号占用的时频资源上。In a fourth aspect, the present application provides a signal transmission method, which is applied to a terminal device side, where the method includes: the terminal device receives the first indication information, where the first indication information indicates the time-frequency resources occupied by the at least two groups of the first reference signals. Position, the antenna ports associated with each of the at least two sets of first reference signals are not quasi-co-located. Then, the terminal device determines, according to the first indication information, time-frequency resources occupied by at least two groups of first reference signals. The terminal device receives the data signal, and the data signal is not mapped on the time-frequency resource occupied by the at least two groups of the first reference signals.
实施第三方面和第四方面描述的信号传输方法,可以在非相干联合传输(non-coherent joint transmission,NCJT)场景下,在其他传输点(Transmitting receiving point,TRP)发送PTRS的资源上对数据做速率匹配(即不映射数据),可以避免不同的传输点发送的数据对PTRS造成的干扰,从而保证PTRS的相噪估计性能。Implementing the signal transmission method described in the third aspect and the fourth aspect, in the non-coherent joint transmission (NCJT) scenario, the data may be transmitted on the resources of the PTRS transmitted by other transmission points (TRP) Rate matching (that is, no mapping of data) can avoid interference caused by data transmitted by different transmission points to PTRS, thereby ensuring phase noise estimation performance of PTRS.
结合第三方面或第四方面,在一些可选的实施例中,第一指示信息(高层信令,或者高层信息和物理层信令共同指示)可以包括第一信息和第二信息,其中,第一信息用于确定PTRS占用的子载波,第二信息用于确定PTRS占用的符号。具体的,第一信息可以包括以下至少一项:PTRS的发送使能信息、PTRS的天线端口在DMRS Port group中关联的DMRS port的指示信息、DMRS port group的指示信息、或PTRS的频域密度与调度带宽门限值的关联关系的指示信息。具体的,第二信息可以包括:PTRS的时域密度与MCS门限值的关联关系的指示信息。With reference to the third aspect or the fourth aspect, in some optional embodiments, the first indication information (high layer signaling, or the high layer information and the physical layer signaling jointly indicated) may include the first information and the second information, where The first information is used to determine a subcarrier occupied by the PTRS, and the second information is used to determine a symbol occupied by the PTRS. Specifically, the first information may include at least one of the following: the sending enable information of the PTRS, the indication information of the DMRS port associated with the antenna port of the PTRS in the DMRS Port group, the indication information of the DMRS port group, or the frequency domain density of the PTRS. Indicates the association relationship with the scheduling bandwidth threshold. Specifically, the second information may include indication information of a relationship between a time domain density of the PTRS and an MCS threshold.
结合第三方面或第四方面,在一些可选的实施例中,第一参考信号占用的子载波包括:所述第三设备调度给所述第四设备的最大调度带宽对应的频域密度下的子载波。With reference to the third aspect or the fourth aspect, in some optional embodiments, the subcarrier occupied by the first reference signal includes: a frequency domain density corresponding to a maximum scheduling bandwidth of the third device scheduled to the fourth device Subcarriers.
结合第三方面或第四方面,在一些可选的实施例中,第一参考信号占用的符号包括:所述第三设备调度给所述第四设备的最大调制阶数对应的时域密度下的子载波。With reference to the third aspect or the fourth aspect, in some optional embodiments, the symbol occupied by the first reference signal includes: the time domain density corresponding to the maximum modulation order of the third device scheduled to the fourth device Subcarriers.
第五方面,本申请提供了一种通信装置,该通信装置可包括多个功能模块,用于相应的执行第一方面所提供的方法,或者第一方面可能的实施方式中的任意一种所提供的方法。In a fifth aspect, the present application provides a communication device, which may include a plurality of functional modules for respectively performing the method provided by the first aspect, or any one of the possible embodiments of the first aspect. The method provided.
第六方面,本申请提供了一种通信装置,该通信装置可包括多个功能模块,用于相应的执行第二方面所提供的方法,或者第二方面可能的实施方式中的任意一种所提供的方法。In a sixth aspect, the present application provides a communication device, which may include a plurality of functional modules for respectively performing the method provided by the second aspect, or any one of the possible embodiments of the second aspect. The method provided.
第七方面,本申请提供了一种通信装置,用于执行第一方面描述的信号传输方法。所 述终端可包括:存储器以及与所述存储器耦合的处理器、收发器,其中:所述收发器用于与其他通信设备通信。所述存储器用于存储第一方面描述的信号传输方法的实现代码,所述处理器用于执行所述存储器中存储的程序代码,即执行第一方面所提供的方法,或者第一方面可能的实施方式中的任意一种所提供的方法。In a seventh aspect, the present application provides a communication apparatus for performing the signal transmission method described in the first aspect. The terminal can include a memory and a processor, transceiver coupled to the memory, wherein the transceiver is for communicating with other communication devices. The memory is for storing implementation code of a signal transmission method described in the first aspect, the processor is for executing program code stored in the memory, that is, performing the method provided by the first aspect, or a possible implementation of the first aspect The method provided by any of the modes.
第八方面,本申请提供了一种通信装置,用于执行第一方面描述的信号传输方法。所述网络设备可包括:存储器以及与所述存储器耦合的处理器、收发器,其中:所述收发器用于与其他通信设备通信。所述存储器用于存储第一方面描述的信号传输方法的实现代码,所述处理器用于执行所述存储器中存储的程序代码,即执行第一方面所提供的方法,或者第一方面可能的实施方式中的任意一种所提供的方法。In an eighth aspect, the present application provides a communication apparatus for performing the signal transmission method described in the first aspect. The network device can include a memory and a processor, transceiver coupled to the memory, wherein the transceiver is for communicating with other communication devices. The memory is for storing implementation code of a signal transmission method described in the first aspect, the processor is for executing program code stored in the memory, that is, performing the method provided by the first aspect, or a possible implementation of the first aspect The method provided by any of the modes.
第九方面,本申请提供了一种芯片,该芯片可包括:处理器,以及耦合于所述处理器的一个或多个接口。其中,所述处理器可用于从存储器中调用第一方面所提供的信号传输方法,或者第一方面可能的实施方式中的任意一种所提供的信号传输方法的实现程序,并执行该程序包含的指令。所述接口可用于输出所述处理器的处理结果。In a ninth aspect, the application provides a chip, the chip can include a processor, and one or more interfaces coupled to the processor. The processor may be configured to invoke, from a memory, a signal transmission method provided by the first aspect, or an implementation program of a signal transmission method provided by any one of the possible implementations of the first aspect, and execute the program including Instructions. The interface can be used to output processing results of the processor.
第十方面,本申请提供了一种芯片,该芯片可包括:处理器,以及耦合于所述处理器的一个或多个接口。其中,所述处理器可用于从存储器中调用第一方面所提供的信号传输方法,或者第一方面可能的实施方式中的任意一种所提供的信号传输方法的实现程序,并执行该程序包含的指令。所述接口可用于输出所述处理器的处理结果。In a tenth aspect, the application provides a chip, the chip can include a processor, and one or more interfaces coupled to the processor. The processor may be configured to invoke, from a memory, a signal transmission method provided by the first aspect, or an implementation program of a signal transmission method provided by any one of the possible implementations of the first aspect, and execute the program including Instructions. The interface can be used to output processing results of the processor.
第十一方面,本申请提供了一种网络设备,该网络设备可包括多个功能模块,用于相应的执行第三方面所提供的方法,或者第三方面可能的实施方式中的任意一种所提供的方法。In an eleventh aspect, the application provides a network device, which may include multiple functional modules for respectively performing the method provided by the third aspect, or any one of the possible implementation manners of the third aspect. The method provided.
第十二方面,本申请提供了一种终端设备,该终端设备可包括多个功能模块,用于相应的执行第四方面所提供的方法,或者第四方面可能的实施方式中的任意一种所提供的方法。In a twelfth aspect, the present application provides a terminal device, which may include a plurality of functional modules for respectively performing the method provided by the fourth aspect, or any one of the possible implementation manners of the fourth aspect The method provided.
第十三方面,本申请提供了一种网络设备,用于执行第三方面描述的信号传输方法。所述终端设备可包括:存储器以及与所述存储器耦合的处理器、收发器,其中:所述收发器用于与其他通信设备(如网络设备)通信。所述存储器用于存储第三方面描述的信号传输方法的实现代码,所述处理器用于执行所述存储器中存储的程序代码,即执行第三方面所提供的方法,或者第三方面可能的实施方式中的任意一种所提供的方法。In a thirteenth aspect, the present application provides a network device for performing the signal transmission method described in the third aspect. The terminal device can include a memory and a processor, transceiver coupled to the memory, wherein the transceiver is for communicating with other communication devices, such as network devices. The memory is for storing implementation code of the signal transmission method described in the third aspect, the processor is configured to execute the program code stored in the memory, that is, to perform the method provided by the third aspect, or the third aspect possible implementation The method provided by any of the modes.
第十四方面,本申请提供了一种终端设备,用于执行第四方面描述的信号传输方法。所述终端设备可包括:存储器以及与所述存储器耦合的处理器、收发器,其中:所述收发器用于与其他通信设备(如终端)通信。所述存储器用于存储第四方面描述的信号传输方法的实现代码,所述处理器用于执行所述存储器中存储的程序代码,即执行第四方面所提供的方法,或者第四方面可能的实施方式中的任意一种所提供的方法。In a fourteenth aspect, the present application provides a terminal device for performing the signal transmission method described in the fourth aspect. The terminal device can include a memory and a processor, transceiver coupled to the memory, wherein the transceiver is for communicating with other communication devices, such as terminals. The memory is for storing implementation code of a signal transmission method described in the fourth aspect, the processor is configured to execute program code stored in the memory, that is, to perform the method provided by the fourth aspect, or a possible implementation of the fourth aspect The method provided by any of the modes.
第十五方面,本申请提供了一种芯片,该芯片可包括:处理器,以及耦合于所述处理器的一个或多个接口。其中,所述处理器可用于从存储器中调用第三方面所提供的信号传输方法,或者第三方面可能的实施方式中的任意一种所提供的信号传输方法的实现程序,并执行该程序包含的指令。所述接口可用于输出所述处理器的处理结果。In a fifteenth aspect, the application provides a chip, the chip can include a processor, and one or more interfaces coupled to the processor. The processor may be used to invoke a signal transmission method provided by the third aspect from the memory, or an implementation program of the signal transmission method provided by any one of the possible implementation manners of the third aspect, and execute the program including Instructions. The interface can be used to output processing results of the processor.
第十六方面,本申请提供了一种芯片,该芯片可包括:处理器,以及耦合于所述处理器的一个或多个接口。其中,所述处理器可用于从存储器中调用第四方面所提供的信号传输方法,或者第四方面可能的实施方式中的任意一种所提供的信号传输方法的实现程序,并执行该程序包含的指令。所述接口可用于输出所述处理器的处理结果。In a sixteenth aspect, the application provides a chip, the chip can include a processor, and one or more interfaces coupled to the processor. The processor may be used to invoke a signal transmission method provided by the fourth aspect from the memory, or an implementation program of the signal transmission method provided by any one of the possible implementations of the fourth aspect, and execute the program including Instructions. The interface can be used to output processing results of the processor.
第十七方面,本申请提供了一种无线通信系统,包括第一设备和第二设备,其中:所述第一设备可用于执行第一方面所提供的信号传输方法,或者第一方面可能的实施方式中的任意一种所提供的信号传输方法;所述第二设备可用于执行第二方面所提供的信号传输方法,或者第二方面可能的实施方式中的任意一种所提供的信号传输方法。In a seventeenth aspect, the present application provides a wireless communication system, including a first device and a second device, where: the first device is operable to perform the signal transmission method provided by the first aspect, or the first aspect is possible a signal transmission method provided by any one of the embodiments; the second device may be configured to perform the signal transmission method provided by the second aspect, or the signal transmission provided by any one of the possible implementations of the second aspect method.
具体的,第一设备可以是第五方面或第七方面描述的通信装置,第二设备可以是第六方面或第八方面描述的通信装置。Specifically, the first device may be the communication device described in the fifth aspect or the seventh aspect, and the second device may be the communication device described in the sixth aspect or the eighth aspect.
第十八方面,本申请提供了一种无线通信系统,包括终端设备和网络设备,其中:所述终端可用于执行第三方面所提供的信号传输方法,或者第三方面可能的实施方式中的任意一种所提供的信号传输方法;所述网络设备可用于执行第四方面所提供的信号传输方法,或者第四方面可能的实施方式中的任意一种所提供的信号传输方法。In an eighteenth aspect, the present application provides a wireless communication system, including a terminal device and a network device, where: the terminal is operative to perform the signal transmission method provided by the third aspect, or in a possible implementation manner of the third aspect Any of the provided signal transmission methods; the network device may be used to perform the signal transmission method provided by the fourth aspect, or the signal transmission method provided by any of the possible implementations of the fourth aspect.
具体的,所述终端设备可以是第十一方面或第十三方面描述的网络设备,所述网络设备可以是第十二方面或第十四方面描述的终端设备。Specifically, the terminal device may be the network device described in the eleventh aspect or the thirteenth aspect, and the network device may be the terminal device described in the twelfth aspect or the fourteenth aspect.
第十九方面,提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,所述可读存储介质上存储有实现第一方面所提供的信号传输方法,或者第一方面可能的实施方式中的任意一种所提供的信号传输方法的程序代码,该程序代码包含运行第一方面所提供的信号传输方法,或者第一方面可能的实施方式中的任意一种所提供的信号传输方法的执行指令。A nineteenth aspect, a computer readable storage medium having stored thereon a signal transmission method for implementing the first aspect, or any one of the possible embodiments of the first aspect The program code of the signal transmission method, the program code comprising the execution of the signal transmission method provided by the first aspect, or the execution instruction of the signal transmission method provided by any of the possible implementations of the first aspect.
第二十方面,提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,所述可读存储介质上存储有实现第二方面所提供的信号传输方法,或者第二方面可能的实施方式中的任意一种所提供的信号传输方法的程序代码,该程序代码包含运行第二方面所提供的信号传输方法,或者第二方面可能的实施方式中的任意一种所提供的信号传输方法的执行指令。In a twentieth aspect, a computer readable storage medium is provided, the readable storage medium storing a signal transmission method implemented by implementing the second aspect, or any one of the possible embodiments of the second aspect A program code of a signal transmission method, the program code comprising an execution instruction of a signal transmission method provided by the operation of the signal transmission method provided by the second aspect, or any one of the possible implementations of the second aspect.
第二十一方面,提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,所述可读存储介质上存储有实现第二方面所提供的信号传输方法,或者第二方面可能的实施方式中的任意一种所提供的信号传输方法的程序代码,该程序代码包含运行第二方面所提供的信号传输方法,或者第二方面可能的实施方式中的任意一种所提供的信号传输方法的执行指令。A twenty-first aspect, a computer readable storage medium storing the signal transmission method provided by the second aspect, or any one of the possible embodiments of the second aspect is provided A program code for providing a signal transmission method, the program code comprising an execution instruction of a signal transmission method provided by operating the second aspect, or a signal transmission method provided by any one of the possible implementations of the second aspect.
第二十二方面,提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,所述可读存储介质上存储有实现第二方面所提供的信号传输方法,或者第二方面可能的实施方式中的任意一种所提供的信号传输方法的程序代码,该程序代码包含运行第二方面所提供的信号传输方法,或者第二方面可能的实施方式中的任意一种所提供的信号传输方法的执行指令。A twenty-second aspect, a computer readable storage medium storing the signal transmission method provided by the second aspect, or any one of the possible embodiments of the second aspect is provided A program code for providing a signal transmission method, the program code comprising an execution instruction of a signal transmission method provided by operating the second aspect, or a signal transmission method provided by any one of the possible implementations of the second aspect.
附图说明DRAWINGS
为了更清楚地说明本发明实施例或背景技术中的技术方案,下面将对本发明实施例或背景技术中所需要使用的附图进行说明。In order to more clearly illustrate the technical solutions in the embodiments of the present invention or the background art, the drawings to be used in the embodiments of the present invention or the background art will be described below.
图1是现有技术中在时域上映射PTRS的规则的示意图;1 is a schematic diagram of a rule for mapping a PTRS in a time domain in the prior art;
图2是DMRS之前的符号上映射有PDSCH的示意图;2 is a schematic diagram of mapping PDSCH on symbols before DMRS;
图3是本申请涉及的一种无线通信系统的架构示意图;3 is a schematic structural diagram of a wireless communication system according to the present application;
图4是本申请的一个实施例提供的终端的硬件架构示意图;4 is a schematic diagram of a hardware architecture of a terminal provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图5是本申请的一个实施例提供的网络设备的硬件架构示意图;FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of a hardware architecture of a network device according to an embodiment of the present application; FIG.
图6是本申请涉及的DMRS的资源映射示意图;6 is a schematic diagram of resource mapping of a DMRS according to the present application;
图7是本申请涉及的时频资源的示意图;7 is a schematic diagram of time-frequency resources involved in the present application;
图8是本申请的提供的一种信号传输方法的流程示意图;8 is a schematic flow chart of a signal transmission method provided by the present application;
图9A-9L是本申请的一个实施例提供的PTRS时域映射规则的示意图;9A-9L are schematic diagrams of PTRS time domain mapping rules provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图10A-10L是本申请的另一个实施例提供的PTRS时域映射规则的示意图;10A-10L are schematic diagrams of PTRS time domain mapping rules provided by another embodiment of the present application;
图11A-11C是本申请的再一个实施例提供的PTRS时域映射规则的示意图;11A-11C are schematic diagrams of PTRS time domain mapping rules provided by still another embodiment of the present application;
图12A-12D是本申请的再一个实施例提供的PTRS时域映射规则的示意图;12A-12D are schematic diagrams of PTRS time domain mapping rules provided by still another embodiment of the present application;
图13是本申请的涉及的非干扰联合传输的场景示意图;13 is a schematic diagram of a scenario of non-interfering joint transmission involved in the present application;
图14是本申请提供的另一种信号传输方法的流程示意图;14 is a schematic flow chart of another signal transmission method provided by the present application;
图15是本申请提供的再一种信号传输方法的流程示意图;15 is a schematic flow chart of still another signal transmission method provided by the present application;
图16是本申请的提供的一种无线通信系统,相关设备的功能框图;16 is a functional block diagram of a related device of a wireless communication system provided by the present application;
图17是本申请的提供的另一种无线通信系统,相关设备的功能框图;17 is a functional block diagram of another related apparatus of the wireless communication system provided by the present application;
图18是本申请的提供的一种装置的结构示意图;Figure 18 is a schematic structural view of an apparatus provided by the present application;
图19是本申请的提供的一种一种装置的结构示意图。19 is a schematic structural view of a device provided by the present application.
具体实施方式detailed description
本申请的实施方式部分使用的术语仅用于对本申请的具体实施例进行解释,而非旨在限定本申请。The terms used in the embodiments of the present application are only used to explain the specific embodiments of the present application, and are not intended to limit the present application.
图3示出了本申请涉及的无线通信系统。所述无线通信系统可以工作在高频频段上,不限于长期演进(Long Term Evolution,LTE)系统,还可以是未来演进的第五代移动通信(the 5th Generation,5G)系统、新空口(NR)系统,机器与机器通信(Machine to Machine,M2M)系统等。如图3所示,无线通信系统10可包括:一个或多个网络设备101,一个或多个终端103,以及核心网115。其中:FIG. 3 shows a wireless communication system to which the present application relates. The wireless communication system can work in a high frequency band, is not limited to a Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, and can be a fifth generation mobile communication (5th generation, 5G) system, a new air interface (NR). System, machine to machine (Machine to Machine, M2M) system. As shown in FIG. 3, the wireless communication system 10 can include one or more network devices 101, one or more terminals 103, and a core network 115. among them:
网络设备101可以为基站,基站可以用于与一个或多个终端进行通信,也可以用于与一个或多个具有部分终端功能的基站进行通信(比如宏基站与微基站,如接入点,之间的通信)。基站可以是时分同步码分多址(Time Division Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access,TD-SCDMA)系统中的基站收发台(Base Transceiver Station,BTS),也可以是LTE系统中的演进型基站(Evolutional Node B,eNB),以及5G系统、新空口(NR)系统中的基站。另外,基站也可以为接入点(Access Point,AP)、传输节点(Trans TRP)、中心单元(Central Unit,CU)或其他网络实体,并且可以包括以上网络实体的功能中的一些或所有功能。The network device 101 can be a base station, and the base station can be used for communicating with one or more terminals, and can also be used for communicating with one or more base stations having partial terminal functions (such as a macro base station and a micro base station, such as an access point, Communication between). The base station may be a Base Transceiver Station (BTS) in a Time Division Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access (TD-SCDMA) system, or may be an evolved base station in an LTE system (Evolutional Node B). , eNB), and base stations in 5G systems, new air interface (NR) systems. In addition, the base station may also be an Access Point (AP), a TransNode (Trans TRP), a Central Unit (CU), or other network entity, and may include some or all of the functions of the above network entities. .
终端103可以分布在整个无线通信系统100中,可以是静止的,也可以是移动的。在本申请的一些实施例中,终端103可以是移动设备、移动台(mobile station)、移动单元(mobile unit)、M2M终端、无线单元,远程单元、用户代理、移动客户端等等。 Terminals 103 may be distributed throughout wireless communication system 100, either stationary or mobile. In some embodiments of the present application, terminal 103 may be a mobile device, a mobile station, a mobile unit, an M2M terminal, a wireless unit, a remote unit, a user agent, a mobile client, and the like.
具体的,网络设备101可用于在网络设备控制器(未示出)的控制下,通过一个或多个天线与终端103通信。在一些实施例中,所述网络设备控制器可以是核心网115的一部分,也可以集成到网络设备101中。具体的,网络设备101可用于通过回程(blackhaul)接口113(如S1接口)向核心网115传输控制信息或者用户数据。具体的,网络设备101与网络设备101之间也可以通过回程(blackhaul)接口111(如X2接口),直接地或者间接地,相互通信。In particular, network device 101 can be used to communicate with terminal 103 over one or more antennas under the control of a network device controller (not shown). In some embodiments, the network device controller may be part of the core network 115 or may be integrated into the network device 101. Specifically, the network device 101 can be configured to transmit control information or user data to the core network 115 through a blackhaul interface 113 (such as an S1 interface). Specifically, the network device 101 and the network device 101 can also communicate with each other directly or indirectly through a blackhaul interface 111 (such as an X2 interface).
图3示出的无线通信系统仅仅是为了更加清楚的说明本申请的技术方案,并不构成对本申请的限定,本领域普通技术人员可知,随着网络架构的演变和新业务场景的出现,本 发明实施例提供的技术方案对于类似的技术问题,同样适用。图3示出了本申请涉及的无线通信系统。所述无线通信系统可以工作在高频频段上,不限于长期演进(Long Term Evolution,LTE)系统,还可以是未来演进的第五代移动通信(the 5th Generation,5G)系统、新空口(NR)系统,机器与机器通信(Machine to Machine,M2M)系统等。如图3所示,无线通信系统10可包括:一个或多个网络设备101,一个或多个终端103,以及核心网115。其中:The wireless communication system shown in FIG. 3 is only for the purpose of more clearly explaining the technical solutions of the present application, and does not constitute a limitation of the present application. Those skilled in the art may know that with the evolution of the network architecture and the emergence of new business scenarios, The technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the invention are equally applicable to similar technical problems. FIG. 3 shows a wireless communication system to which the present application relates. The wireless communication system can work in a high frequency band, is not limited to a Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, and can be a fifth generation mobile communication (5th generation, 5G) system, a new air interface (NR). System, machine to machine (Machine to Machine, M2M) system. As shown in FIG. 3, the wireless communication system 10 can include one or more network devices 101, one or more terminals 103, and a core network 115. among them:
网络设备101可以为基站,基站可以用于与一个或多个终端进行通信,也可以用于与一个或多个具有部分终端功能的基站进行通信(比如宏基站与微基站,如接入点,之间的通信)。基站可以是时分同步码分多址(Time Division Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access,TD-SCDMA)系统中的基站收发台(Base Transceiver Station,BTS),也可以是LTE系统中的演进型基站(Evolutional Node B,eNB),以及5G系统、新空口(NR)系统中的基站。另外,基站也可以为接入点(Access Point,AP)、传输节点(Trans TRP)、中心单元(Central Unit,CU)或其他网络实体,并且可以包括以上网络实体的功能中的一些或所有功能。The network device 101 can be a base station, and the base station can be used for communicating with one or more terminals, and can also be used for communicating with one or more base stations having partial terminal functions (such as a macro base station and a micro base station, such as an access point, Communication between). The base station may be a Base Transceiver Station (BTS) in a Time Division Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access (TD-SCDMA) system, or may be an evolved base station in an LTE system (Evolutional Node B). , eNB), and base stations in 5G systems, new air interface (NR) systems. In addition, the base station may also be an Access Point (AP), a TransNode (Trans TRP), a Central Unit (CU), or other network entity, and may include some or all of the functions of the above network entities. .
终端103可以分布在整个无线通信系统100中,可以是静止的,也可以是移动的。在本申请的一些实施例中,终端103可以是移动设备、移动台(mobile station)、移动单元(mobile unit)、M2M终端、无线单元,远程单元、用户代理、移动客户端等等。 Terminals 103 may be distributed throughout wireless communication system 100, either stationary or mobile. In some embodiments of the present application, terminal 103 may be a mobile device, a mobile station, a mobile unit, an M2M terminal, a wireless unit, a remote unit, a user agent, a mobile client, and the like.
具体的,网络设备101可用于在网络设备控制器(未示出)的控制下,通过一个或多个天线与终端103通信。在一些实施例中,所述网络设备控制器可以是核心网115的一部分,也可以集成到网络设备101中。具体的,网络设备101可用于通过回程(blackhaul)接口113(如S1接口)向核心网115传输控制信息或者用户数据。具体的,网络设备101与网络设备101之间也可以通过回程(blackhaul)接口111(如X2接口),直接地或者间接地,相互通信。In particular, network device 101 can be used to communicate with terminal 103 over one or more antennas under the control of a network device controller (not shown). In some embodiments, the network device controller may be part of the core network 115 or may be integrated into the network device 101. Specifically, the network device 101 can be configured to transmit control information or user data to the core network 115 through a blackhaul interface 113 (such as an S1 interface). Specifically, the network device 101 and the network device 101 can also communicate with each other directly or indirectly through a blackhaul interface 111 (such as an X2 interface).
图3示出的无线通信系统仅仅是为了更加清楚的说明本申请的技术方案,并不构成对本申请的限定,本领域普通技术人员可知,随着网络架构的The wireless communication system shown in FIG. 3 is only for the purpose of more clearly explaining the technical solution of the present application, and does not constitute a limitation of the present application. As those skilled in the art can understand, with the network architecture
参考图4,图4示出了本申请的一些实施例提供的终端200。如图4所示,终端200可包括:一个或多个终端处理器201、存储器202、通信接口203、接收器205、发射器206、耦合器207、天线208、用户接口202,以及输入输出模块(包括音频输入输出模块210、按键输入模块211以及显示器212等)。这些部件可通过总线204或者其他方式连接,图4以通过总线连接为例。其中:Referring to Figure 4, there is shown a terminal 200 provided by some embodiments of the present application. As shown in FIG. 4, the terminal 200 may include: one or more terminal processors 201, a memory 202, a communication interface 203, a receiver 205, a transmitter 206, a coupler 207, an antenna 208, a user interface 202, and an input and output module. (including audio input and output module 210, key input module 211, display 212, etc.). These components can be connected by bus 204 or other means, and FIG. 4 is exemplified by a bus connection. among them:
通信接口203可用于终端200与其他通信设备,例如网络设备,进行通信。具体的,所述网络设备可以是图8所示的网络设备300。具体的,通信接口203可以是长期演进(LTE)(4G)通信接口,也可以是5G或者未来新空口的通信接口。不限于无线通信接口,终端200还可以配置有有线的通信接口203,例如局域接入网(Local Access Network,LAN)接口。 Communication interface 203 can be used by terminal 200 to communicate with other communication devices, such as network devices. Specifically, the network device may be the network device 300 shown in FIG. 8. Specifically, the communication interface 203 may be a Long Term Evolution (LTE) (4G) communication interface, or may be a 5G or a future communication interface of a new air interface. Not limited to the wireless communication interface, the terminal 200 may be configured with a wired communication interface 203, such as a Local Access Network (LAN) interface.
发射器206可用于对终端处理器201输出的信号进行发射处理,例如信号调制。接收器205可用于对天线208接收的移动通信信号进行接收处理,例如信号解调。在本申请的一些实施例中,发射器206和接收器205可看作一个无线调制解调器。在终端200中,发射器206和接收器205的数量均可以是一个或者多个。天线208可用于将传输线中的电磁 能转换成自由空间中的电磁波,或者将自由空间中的电磁波转换成传输线中的电磁能。耦合器207用于将天线208接收到的移动通信信号分成多路,分配给多个的接收器205。 Transmitter 206 can be used to perform transmission processing, such as signal modulation, on signals output by terminal processor 201. Receiver 205 can be used to perform reception processing, such as signal demodulation, on the mobile communication signals received by antenna 208. In some embodiments of the present application, transmitter 206 and receiver 205 can be viewed as a wireless modem. In the terminal 200, the number of the transmitter 206 and the receiver 205 may each be one or more. The antenna 208 can be used to convert electromagnetic energy in a transmission line into electromagnetic waves in free space or to convert electromagnetic waves in free space into electromagnetic energy in a transmission line. The coupler 207 is configured to divide the mobile communication signal received by the antenna 208 into multiple channels and distribute it to a plurality of receivers 205.
除了图4所示的发射器206和接收器205,终端200还可包括其他通信部件,例如GPS模块、蓝牙(Bluetooth)模块、无线高保真(Wireless Fidelity,Wi-Fi)模块等。不限于上述表述的无线通信信号,终端200还可以支持其他无线通信信号,例如卫星信号、短波信号等等。不限于无线通信,终端200还可以配置有有线网络接口(如LAN接口)来支持有线通信。In addition to the transmitter 206 and receiver 205 shown in FIG. 4, the terminal 200 may also include other communication components such as a GPS module, a Bluetooth module, a Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) module, and the like. Not limited to the above-described wireless communication signals, the terminal 200 can also support other wireless communication signals such as satellite signals, short-wave signals, and the like. Not limited to wireless communication, the terminal 200 may also be configured with a wired network interface (such as a LAN interface) to support wired communication.
所述输入输出模块可用于实现终端200和用户/外部环境之间的交互,可主要包括包括音频输入输出模块210、按键输入模块211以及显示器212等。具体的,所述输入输出模块还可包括:摄像头、触摸屏以及传感器等等。其中,所述输入输出模块均通过用户接口209与终端处理器201进行通信。The input and output module can be used to implement the interaction between the terminal 200 and the user/external environment, and can include the audio input and output module 210, the key input module 211, the display 212, and the like. Specifically, the input and output module may further include: a camera, a touch screen, a sensor, and the like. The input and output modules communicate with the terminal processor 201 through the user interface 209.
存储器202与终端处理器201耦合,用于存储各种软件程序和/或多组指令。具体的,存储器202可包括高速随机存取的存储器,并且也可包括非易失性存储器,例如一个或多个磁盘存储设备、闪存设备或其他非易失性固态存储设备。存储器202可以存储操作系统(下述简称系统),例如ANDROID,IOS,WINDOWS,或者LINUX等嵌入式操作系统。存储器202还可以存储网络通信程序,该网络通信程序可用于与一个或多个附加设备,一个或多个终端设备,一个或多个网络设备进行通信。存储器202还可以存储用户接口程序,该用户接口程序可以通过图形化的操作界面将应用程序的内容形象逼真的显示出来,并通过菜单、对话框以及按键等输入控件接收用户对应用程序的控制操作。 Memory 202 is coupled to terminal processor 201 for storing various software programs and/or sets of instructions. In particular, memory 202 can include high speed random access memory, and can also include non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid state storage devices. The memory 202 can store an operating system (hereinafter referred to as a system) such as an embedded operating system such as ANDROID, IOS, WINDOWS, or LINUX. The memory 202 can also store a network communication program that can be used to communicate with one or more additional devices, one or more terminal devices, one or more network devices. The memory 202 can also store a user interface program, which can realistically display the content of the application through a graphical operation interface, and receive user control operations on the application through input controls such as menus, dialog boxes, and keys. .
在本申请的一些实施例中,存储器202可用于存储本申请的一个或多个实施例提供的信号传输方法在终端200侧的实现程序。关于本申请的一个或多个实施例提供的资源映射方法的实现,请参考后续实施例。In some embodiments of the present application, the memory 202 can be used to store an implementation of the signal transmission method provided by one or more embodiments of the present application on the terminal 200 side. For implementation of the resource mapping method provided by one or more embodiments of the present application, please refer to the subsequent embodiments.
终端处理器201可用于读取和执行计算机可读指令。具体的,终端处理器201可用于调用存储于存储器212中的程序,例如本申请的一个或多个实施例提供的资源映射方法在终端200侧的实现程序,并执行该程序包含的指令。 Terminal processor 201 can be used to read and execute computer readable instructions. Specifically, the terminal processor 201 can be used to invoke a program stored in the memory 212, such as a resource mapping method provided by one or more embodiments of the present application, to implement the program on the terminal 200 side, and execute the instructions included in the program.
可以理解的,终端200可以是图5示出的无线通信系统100中的终端103,可实施为移动设备,移动台(mobile station),移动单元(mobile unit),无线单元,远程单元,用户代理,移动客户端等等。It can be understood that the terminal 200 can be the terminal 103 in the wireless communication system 100 shown in FIG. 5, and can be implemented as a mobile device, a mobile station, a mobile unit, a wireless unit, a remote unit, and a user agent. , mobile client and more.
需要说明的,图4所示的终端200仅仅是本申请实施例的一种实现方式,实际应用中,终端200还可以包括更多或更少的部件,这里不作限制。It should be noted that the terminal 200 shown in FIG. 4 is only one implementation of the embodiment of the present application. In an actual application, the terminal 200 may further include more or less components, which are not limited herein.
参考图5,图5示出了本申请的一些实施例提供的网络设备300。如图5所示,网络设备300可包括:一个或多个网络设备处理器301、存储器302、通信接口303、发射器305、接收器306、耦合器307和天线308。这些部件可通过总线304或者其他式连接,图5以通过总线连接为例。其中:Referring to Figure 5, there is shown a network device 300 provided by some embodiments of the present application. As shown in FIG. 5, network device 300 can include one or more network device processors 301, memory 302, communication interface 303, transmitter 305, receiver 306, coupler 307, and antenna 308. These components can be connected via bus 304 or other types, and FIG. 5 is exemplified by a bus connection. among them:
通信接口303可用于网络设备300与其他通信设备,例如终端设备或其他网络设备,进行通信。具体的,所述终端设备可以是图5所示的终端200。具体的,通信接口303通信接口203可以是长期演进(LTE)(4G)通信接口,也可以是5G或者未来新空口的通信接口。不限于无线通信接口,网络设备300还可以配置有有线的通信接口303来支持有线通信,例如一个网络设备300与其他网络设备300之间的回程链接可以是有线通信连接。 Communication interface 303 can be used by network device 300 to communicate with other communication devices, such as terminal devices or other network devices. Specifically, the terminal device may be the terminal 200 shown in FIG. 5. Specifically, the communication interface 303 may be a Long Term Evolution (LTE) (4G) communication interface, or may be a 5G or a future communication interface of a new air interface. Not limited to the wireless communication interface, the network device 300 may also be configured with a wired communication interface 303 to support wired communication. For example, the backhaul link between one network device 300 and other network devices 300 may be a wired communication connection.
发射器305可用于对网络设备处理器301输出的信号进行发射处理,例如信号调制。接收器306可用于对天线308接收的移动通信信号进行接收处理。例如信号解调。在本申请的一些实施例中,发射器305和接收器306可看作一个无线调制解调器。在网络设备300中,发射器305和接收器306的数量均可以是一个或者多个。天线308可用于将传输线中的电磁能转换成自由空间中的电磁波,或者将自由空间中的电磁波转换成传输线中的电磁能。耦合器307可用于将移动通信号分成多路,分配给多个的接收器306。 Transmitter 305 can be used to perform transmission processing, such as signal modulation, on signals output by network device processor 301. Receiver 306 can be used to perform reception processing on the mobile communication signals received by antenna 308. For example, signal demodulation. In some embodiments of the present application, transmitter 305 and receiver 306 can be viewed as a wireless modem. In the network device 300, the number of the transmitter 305 and the receiver 306 may each be one or more. The antenna 308 can be used to convert electromagnetic energy in a transmission line into electromagnetic waves in free space, or to convert electromagnetic waves in free space into electromagnetic energy in a transmission line. Coupler 307 can be used to divide the mobile pass signal into multiple channels and distribute it to multiple receivers 306.
存储器302与网络设备处理器301耦合,用于存储各种软件程序和/或多组指令。具体的,存储器302可包括高速随机存取的存储器,并且也可包括非易失性存储器,例如一个或多个磁盘存储设备、闪存设备或其他非易失性固态存储设备。存储器302可以存储操作系统(下述简称系统),例如uCOS、VxWorks、RTLinux等嵌入式操作系统。存储器302还可以存储网络通信程序,该网络通信程序可用于与一个或多个附加设备,一个或多个终端设备,一个或多个网络设备进行通信。 Memory 302 is coupled to network device processor 301 for storing various software programs and/or sets of instructions. In particular, memory 302 may include high speed random access memory, and may also include non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid state storage devices. The memory 302 can store an operating system (hereinafter referred to as a system) such as an embedded operating system such as uCOS, VxWorks, or RTLinux. The memory 302 can also store a network communication program that can be used to communicate with one or more additional devices, one or more terminal devices, one or more network devices.
网络设备处理器301可用于进行无线信道管理、实施呼叫和通信链路的建立和拆除,并为本控制区内的用户提供小区切换控制等。具体的,网络设备处理器301可包括:管理/通信模块(Administration Module/Communication Module,AM/CM)(用于话路交换和信息交换的中心)、基本模块(Basic Module,BM)(用于完成呼叫处理、信令处理、无线资源管理、无线链路的管理和电路维护功能)、码变换及子复用单元(Transcoder and SubMultiplexer,TCSM)(用于完成复用解复用及码变换功能)等等。The network device processor 301 can be used to perform wireless channel management, implement call and communication link establishment and teardown, and provide cell handover control and the like for users in the control area. Specifically, the network device processor 301 may include: an Administration Module/Communication Module (AM/CM) (a center for voice exchange and information exchange), and a Basic Module (BM) (for Complete call processing, signaling processing, radio resource management, radio link management and circuit maintenance functions), code conversion and sub-multiplexer (TCSM) (for multiplexing demultiplexing and code conversion functions) )and many more.
本申请实施例中,网络设备处理器301可用于读取和执行计算机可读指令。具体的,网络设备处理器301可用于调用存储于存储器302中的程序,例如本申请的一个或多个实施例提供的资源映射方法在网络设备300侧的实现程序,并执行该程序包含的指令。In the embodiment of the present application, the network device processor 301 can be used to read and execute computer readable instructions. Specifically, the network device processor 301 can be used to invoke a program stored in the memory 302, such as the resource mapping method provided by one or more embodiments of the present application, on the network device 300 side, and execute the instructions included in the program. .
可以理解的,网络设备300可以是图5示出的无线通信系统100中的基站101,可实施为基站收发台,无线收发器,一个基本服务集(BSS),一个扩展服务集(ESS),NodeB,eNodeB,接入点或TRP等等。It can be understood that the network device 300 can be the base station 101 in the wireless communication system 100 shown in FIG. 5, and can be implemented as a base transceiver station, a wireless transceiver, a basic service set (BSS), and an extended service set (ESS). NodeB, eNodeB, access point or TRP, etc.
需要说明的,图5所示的网络设备300仅仅是本申请实施例的一种实现方式,实际应用中,网络设备300还可以包括更多或更少的部件,这里不作限制。It should be noted that the network device 300 shown in FIG. 5 is only one implementation of the embodiment of the present application. In actual applications, the network device 300 may further include more or fewer components, which are not limited herein.
基于前述无线通信系统100、终端200以及网络设备300分别对应的实施例,本申请提供了一种资源映射方法。Based on the foregoing embodiments of the wireless communication system 100, the terminal 200, and the network device 300 respectively, the present application provides a resource mapping method.
本申请的主要原理可包括:在承载前载DMRS(front-loaded DMRS)的符号之前的承载数据信号的符号上也映射相位跟踪参考信号(PT-RS)。这样,可确保映射在DMRS之前的符号上的数据信道也会有PT-RS映射,从而保证相噪估计性能。The main principle of the present application may include mapping a phase tracking reference signal (PT-RS) on a symbol of a bearer data signal before a symbol carrying a pre-loaded DMRS (DMRS). In this way, it is ensured that the data channel mapped on the symbol before the DMRS also has a PT-RS mapping, thereby ensuring phase noise estimation performance.
本申请中,承载前载DMRS的符号可以称为第二符号。第二符号是指承载DMRS的连续的至少一个符号,该至少一个符号包括承载DMRS的第一个符号。In the present application, a symbol carrying a preloaded DMRS may be referred to as a second symbol. The second symbol refers to a contiguous at least one symbol carrying a DMRS, the at least one symbol comprising a first symbol carrying a DMRS.
如图6所示,DMRS可包括前载DMRS(front-loaded DMRS)和附加DMRS(additional-DMRS)。前载DMRS是指在DMRS符号中连续占用索引最小的一个或多个DMRS符号的DMRS。附加DMRS是指前载DMRS之外的其他DMRS。这里,DMRS符号是指承载有DMRS的符号。As shown in FIG. 6, the DMRS may include a front-loaded DMRS (pre-loaded DMRS) and an additional DMRS (additional-DMRS). The preloaded DMRS refers to a DMRS that continuously occupies one or more DMRS symbols with the smallest index in the DMRS symbol. The additional DMRS refers to other DMRSs other than the preloaded DMRS. Here, the DMRS symbol refers to a symbol carrying a DMRS.
例如,在图6的示例中,DMRS符号为:符号3、符号4和符号7。承载前载DMRS的符号为连续的2个符号:符号3和符号4,其中,符号3是承载DMRS的第一个符号,即 第一个DMRS符号。示例仅仅用于解释本申请,不应构成限定。For example, in the example of FIG. 6, the DMRS symbols are: symbol 3, symbol 4, and symbol 7. The symbols carrying the pre-loaded DMRS are two consecutive symbols: symbol 3 and symbol 4, where symbol 3 is the first symbol carrying the DMRS, ie the first DMRS symbol. The examples are merely illustrative of the application and should not be construed as limiting.
本申请中,相位跟踪参考信号(PT-RS)的映射优先级可以低于以下至少一项:物理下行控制信道(PDCCH)、物理上行控制信道(physical uplink control channel,PUCCH)、同步信号块(synchronize signal block,SS block)、估计信道状态信息参考信号(channel state information reference signal,CSI-RS)、探测参考信号(Sounding Reference Signal,SRS)、解调参考信号(DMRS)等。也即是说,PT-RS不映射在需要映射上述任意一种信号的资源上。这样,通过确立PT-RS与其他参考信号、物理信道的映射优先级,在PT-RS与其他参考信号、物理信道发生资源冲突时,可通过不映射PT-RS的方式避免冲突。In this application, the mapping priority of the phase tracking reference signal (PT-RS) may be lower than at least one of the following: a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH), a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH), and a synchronization signal block ( The synchronization signal block (SS block), the channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS), the sounding reference signal (SRS), the demodulation reference signal (DMRS), and the like. That is to say, the PT-RS is not mapped on a resource that needs to map any of the above signals. In this way, by establishing a mapping priority between the PT-RS and other reference signals and physical channels, when a resource conflict occurs between the PT-RS and other reference signals and physical channels, the collision can be avoided by not mapping the PT-RS.
本申请中,PT-RS的映射可包括以下两部分:In this application, the mapping of the PT-RS may include the following two parts:
3.第二符号(承载前载DMRS的符号)之前的承载数据信号的符号上的PT-RS映射。3. The PT-RS mapping on the symbol of the bearer data signal before the second symbol (the symbol carrying the pre-loaded DMRS).
4.第二符号(承载前载DMRS的符号)之后的承载数据信号的符号上的PT-RS映射。4. PT-RS mapping on the symbol of the bearer data signal following the second symbol (the symbol carrying the pre-loaded DMRS).
这里,第二符号之前的符号是指索引小于第二符号的索引的符号,第二符号之后的符号是指索引大于第二符号的索引的符号。例如,在图6的示例中,第二符号为:符号3和符号4,第二符号之前的符号为:符号0-2,第二符号之后的符号为:符号5-13。示例仅仅用于解释本申请,不应构成限定。Here, the symbol before the second symbol refers to the symbol whose index is smaller than the index of the second symbol, and the symbol after the second symbol refers to the symbol whose index is larger than the index of the second symbol. For example, in the example of FIG. 6, the second symbol is: symbol 3 and symbol 4, the symbols before the second symbol are: symbol 0-2, and the symbols following the second symbol are: symbols 5-13. The examples are merely illustrative of the application and should not be construed as limiting.
(1)在第二符号之前的符号上的PT-RS时域映射规则(1) PT-RS time domain mapping rule on symbols before the second symbol
第一种映射规则,PT-RS映射在第二符号之前的承载数据信号的第一个符号上。也即是说,从数据信道(PUSCH/PDSCH)的第一个符号开始映射PT-RS。这样可确保第二符号之前的符号上的数据信道也会有PT-RS映射,从而保证相噪估计性能。后续实施例一、二详细描述了这种映射方式,这里先不赘述。The first mapping rule, the PT-RS is mapped on the first symbol of the bearer data signal preceding the second symbol. That is to say, the PT-RS is mapped starting from the first symbol of the data channel (PUSCH/PDSCH). This ensures that the data channel on the symbol before the second symbol also has a PT-RS mapping, thereby ensuring phase noise estimation performance. This mapping method is described in detail in subsequent embodiments 1 and 2, and will not be described here.
第二种映射规则,在第二符号之前,用于承载PT-RS的符号的索引与第一差值有关,第一差值(H2)为承载DMRS的第一个符号的索引(l 0)和承载数据信号的第一个符号的索引的差值。即,在所述第二符号之前,用于承载PT-RS的符号的索引与第二符号之前的,DMRS的第一个符号与数据信道的第一个符号相差的相关。后续实施例三详细描述了这种映射方式,这里先不赘述。 The second mapping rule, before the second symbol, the index of the symbol used to carry the PT-RS is related to the first difference, and the first difference (H2) is the index (l 0 ) of the first symbol carrying the DMRS. The difference from the index of the first symbol carrying the data signal. That is, before the second symbol, the index of the symbol used to carry the PT-RS is related to the difference between the first symbol of the DMRS and the first symbol of the data channel before the second symbol. This mapping method is described in detail in the following Embodiment 3, and will not be described here.
不限于上述2种方式,PT-RS还可以按照其他方式映射在第二符号之前的承载数据信号的符号上,本申请不作限制。The PT-RS may be mapped to the symbol of the bearer data signal before the second symbol in other manners, which is not limited in this application.
(2)在第二符号之后的符号上的PT-RS时域映射规则(2) PT-RS time domain mapping rule on the symbol after the second symbol
第一种映射规则,在第二符号之后,PT-RS所映射的起始符号的索引可以由PT-RS的时域密度确定。且按照符号索引值递增的顺序,每L个符号中索引最小的符号上映射有PT-RS。L是PT-RS的时域密度的倒数。The first mapping rule, after the second symbol, the index of the starting symbol mapped by the PT-RS may be determined by the time domain density of the PT-RS. And in the order in which the symbol index values are incremented, the PT-RS is mapped on the symbol with the smallest index among every L symbols. L is the reciprocal of the time domain density of the PT-RS.
例如,在图1的示例中,若PT-RS的时域密度是“1”,则PT-RS所映射的起始符号是第二符号之后的第1个符号,即符号3。若PT-RS的时域密度是“1/2”,则PT-RS所映射的起始符号是第二符号之后的第2个符号,即符号4。若PT-RS的时域密度是“1/4”,则PT-RS所映射的起始符号是第二符号之后的第1个符号,即符号3。示例仅仅用于解释本申请,不应构成限定。实际应用中,PT-RS的时域密度、PT-RS所映射的起始符号的索引和PT-RS的时域密度之间的映射关系还可以不同,本申请不作限制。For example, in the example of FIG. 1, if the time domain density of the PT-RS is "1", the start symbol mapped by the PT-RS is the first symbol after the second symbol, that is, the symbol 3. If the time domain density of the PT-RS is "1/2", the start symbol mapped by the PT-RS is the second symbol after the second symbol, that is, the symbol 4. If the time domain density of the PT-RS is "1/4", the start symbol mapped by the PT-RS is the first symbol after the second symbol, that is, the symbol 3. The examples are merely illustrative of the application and should not be construed as limiting. In actual applications, the mapping between the time domain density of the PT-RS, the index of the start symbol mapped by the PT-RS, and the time domain density of the PT-RS may be different, and is not limited in this application.
具体的,PT-RS的时域密度可以和CP类型、子载波间隔、调制阶数中至少一项相关,可参见后面内容,这里不赘述。Specifically, the time domain density of the PT-RS may be related to at least one of a CP type, a subcarrier spacing, and a modulation order. For details, refer to the following content, and details are not described herein.
具体的,PT-RS的时域密度,以及PT-RS的时域密度和PT-RS所映射的起始符号的索引之间的映射关系可以由协议预定义,也可以由网络设备通过高层信令(如RRC信令)或 者PDCCH配置。Specifically, the time domain density of the PT-RS, and the mapping relationship between the time domain density of the PT-RS and the index of the start symbol mapped by the PT-RS may be predefined by a protocol, or may be passed by the network device through a high layer letter. Order (such as RRC signaling) or PDCCH configuration.
第二种映射规则,PTRS从物理数据共享信道(PDSCH/PUSCH)的第一个符号开始映射,均匀映射在时域单元内的时域符号(包括第二符号、第二符号之前的符号和第二符号之后的符号)上。这样,PT-RS也均匀映射在第二符号之后的符号上。可选的,PT-RS的映射优先级低于PDCCH或PUCCH或SS block或CSI-RS或SRS等等。后续实施例一会详细描述这种映射方式,这里先不赘述。The second mapping rule, the PTRS starts to map from the first symbol of the physical data sharing channel (PDSCH/PUSCH), and uniformly maps the time domain symbols in the time domain unit (including the second symbol, the symbol before the second symbol, and the On the symbol after the second symbol). Thus, the PT-RS is also uniformly mapped on the symbol following the second symbol. Optionally, the mapping priority of the PT-RS is lower than the PDCCH or the PUCCH or the SS block or the CSI-RS or the SRS. This mapping method will be described in detail in the following embodiments, and will not be described here.
第三种映射规则,PT-RS映射在第二符号之后的承载数据信号的最后一个符号上,且按照符号索引值递减的顺序,均匀映射在第二符号之后的符号上。后续实施例二会详细描述这种映射方式,这里先不赘述。A third mapping rule, the PT-RS is mapped on the last symbol of the bearer data signal after the second symbol, and uniformly mapped on the symbol following the second symbol in descending order of the symbol index value. This mapping method will be described in detail in the following second embodiment, and will not be described here.
第四种映射规则,在第二符号之后,用于承载PT-RS的符号的索引与第二符号之后的符号个数相关。后续实施例三会详细描述这种映射方式,这里先不赘述。A fourth mapping rule, after the second symbol, the index of the symbol used to carry the PT-RS is related to the number of symbols after the second symbol. This mapping method will be described in detail in the following third embodiment, and will not be described here.
上述4种映射方式都可以实现将PT-RS均匀映射在第二符号之后的符号上。不限于上述4种方式,PT-RS还可以按照其他方式映射在第二符号之后的符号上,本申请不作限制。The above four mapping methods can achieve uniform mapping of the PT-RS on the symbol after the second symbol. The PT-RS may also be mapped to the symbols following the second symbol in other manners, which is not limited in this application.
本申请中,在第二符号之前和之后,PT-RS的时域密度可以相同,也可以不同。In the present application, the time domain density of the PT-RS may be the same or different before and after the second symbol.
本申请涉及的资源是指时频资源,包括时域资源和频域资源,通常以资源粒子(Resource Element,RE),资源块(Resource Block,RB),符号(symbol),子载波(subcarrier),传输间隔(Transmission Time Interval,TTI)表示。如图7所示,整个系统资源由频域和时域分割的格子组成,其中,1个格子表示1个RE,1个RE由频率上一个子载波,时域上一个符号构成。1个RB由时域上连续T(T为正整数)个符号,频域上连续M(M为正整数)个子载波构成。例如,在LTE中,T=7,M=12。The resources involved in the present application refer to time-frequency resources, including time domain resources and frequency domain resources, and are usually resource elements (Resource Element, RE), Resource Block (RB), symbol (symbol), and subcarrier (subcarrier). , Transmission Time Interval (TTI) is indicated. As shown in FIG. 7, the entire system resource is composed of a frequency domain and a time domain divided grid, wherein one grid represents one RE, and one RE is composed of one subcarrier on the frequency and one symbol on the time domain. One RB is composed of consecutive T (T is a positive integer) symbols in the time domain, and continuous M (M is a positive integer) subcarriers in the frequency domain. For example, in LTE, T=7, M=12.
本申请中,符号的索引值按照从小到大的顺序与时序从先到后对应,即时序上符号索引值小的符号在符号索引值大的符号的前面。本申请对具体实现的符号索引与时序对应关系不做限定,例如也可以将符号索引值按照从大到小的顺序与时序从先到后对应。In the present application, the index values of the symbols correspond to the timing from first to last in the order of small to large, that is, the symbols whose symbol index values are small in time series are in front of the symbols with large symbol index values. The present application does not limit the specific symbol index and timing correspondence. For example, the symbol index values may correspond to the timing from first to last in descending order.
需要说明的,本申请提供附图仅仅用于解释本发明实施例,未来通信标准中的资源块的大小、资源块所包括的符号数量和子载波数量等等都可能不同,本申请提及的资源块不限于附图所示。It should be noted that the present application provides a drawing for explaining only the embodiment of the present invention. The size of the resource block in the future communication standard, the number of symbols included in the resource block, the number of subcarriers, and the like may be different. The resources mentioned in this application. The blocks are not limited to the drawings.
基于上述发明原理,图8示出了本申请提供的一种信号传输方法的总体流程。下面展开描述:Based on the above inventive principles, FIG. 8 shows the overall flow of a signal transmission method provided by the present application. The following expands the description:
S101,第一设备将第一参考信号(PT-RS)映射在第一符号上。参考前述发明原理可知,第一符号包括索引小于第二符号(前载DMRS符号)的索引的承载数据信号的符号,第二符号是指承载DMRS的连续的至少一个符号,该至少一个符号包括承载DMRS的第一个符号。S101. The first device maps the first reference signal (PT-RS) on the first symbol. Referring to the foregoing inventive principles, the first symbol includes a symbol of a bearer data signal whose index is smaller than an index of the second symbol (preloaded DMRS symbol), and the second symbol refers to at least one symbol carrying a DMRS, the at least one symbol includes a bearer. The first symbol of the DMRS.
具体的,第一设备可以根据PT-RS的时域密度和协议预定义的PT-RS时域映射规则,将PT-RS映射在时域上。关于在第二符号之前的符号上的PT-RS时域映射规则,以及在第二符号之后的符号上的PT-RS时域映射规则,可参考前述发明原理以及后续的实施例,这里不赘述。Specifically, the first device may map the PT-RS to the time domain according to the time domain density of the PT-RS and the PT-RS time domain mapping rule predefined by the protocol. For the PT-RS time domain mapping rule on the symbol before the second symbol, and the PT-RS time domain mapping rule on the symbol after the second symbol, reference may be made to the foregoing inventive principles and subsequent embodiments, and details are not described herein. .
S102,第一设备向第二设备发送第一参考信号(PT-RS)。相应的,第二设备接收第一设备发送的第一参考信号(PT-RS)。具体的,第二设备可以根据第一参考信号(PT-RS)的时域密度,以及协议静态定义了或者高层信令配置了PT-RS时域映射规则,确定出承载 第一参考信号(PT-RS)的符号(即第一符号),并在这些时域符号上接收第一参考信号(PT-RS)。S102. The first device sends a first reference signal (PT-RS) to the second device. Correspondingly, the second device receives the first reference signal (PT-RS) sent by the first device. Specifically, the second device may determine, according to the time domain density of the first reference signal (PT-RS), the static definition of the protocol, or the high-level signaling, configure the PT-RS time domain mapping rule, and determine to carry the first reference signal (PT). The symbol of the -RS) (ie the first symbol) and the first reference signal (PT-RS) is received on these time domain symbols.
S103,第二设备根据第一参考信号(PT-RS)进行相位跟踪。S103. The second device performs phase tracking according to the first reference signal (PT-RS).
具体的,PT-RS时域映射规则可以由协议静态定义,或者由高层信令配置。其中,第一参考信号(PT-RS)映射在哪些符号上可以根据第一参考信号(PT-RS)的时域密度确定(可参考后续实施例一)。或者,第一参考信号(PT-RS)映射在哪些符号上可以根据第一参考信号(PT-RS)的时域密度、承载前载DMRS的符号(即第二符号)的位置确定(可参考后续实施例二、三)。Specifically, the PT-RS time domain mapping rule may be statically defined by the protocol or configured by higher layer signaling. Wherein, the symbols on which the first reference signal (PT-RS) is mapped may be determined according to the time domain density of the first reference signal (PT-RS) (refer to the following first embodiment). Alternatively, the symbols on which the first reference signal (PT-RS) is mapped may be determined according to the time domain density of the first reference signal (PT-RS) and the position of the symbol carrying the pre-loaded DMRS (ie, the second symbol) (refer to Subsequent Embodiments 2 and 3).
具体的,PT-RS的时域密度可以和CP类型、子载波间隔、调制阶数(MCS)中至少一项相关,即第一设备无需额外向第二设备通知PT-RS的时域密度,第二设备通过CP类型、子载波间隔、调制阶数(MCS)中至少一项即可确定出PT-RS的时域密度。具体的,承载前载DMRS的符号可以通过DMRS资源图样(协议定义了不同天线端口采用的DMRS资源图样)即可获知第二符号的位置,即第一设备无需额外向第二设备通知第二符号的位置,第二设备通过DMRS的天线端口即可确定出第二符号的位置。Specifically, the time domain density of the PT-RS may be related to at least one of a CP type, a subcarrier spacing, and a modulation order (MCS), that is, the first device does not need to additionally notify the second device of the time domain density of the PT-RS. The second device determines the time domain density of the PT-RS by at least one of a CP type, a subcarrier spacing, and a modulation order (MCS). Specifically, the symbol carrying the pre-loaded DMRS can learn the location of the second symbol by using the DMRS resource pattern (the protocol defines the DMRS resource pattern used by different antenna ports), that is, the first device does not need to additionally notify the second device of the second symbol. The location of the second symbol can be determined by the second device through the antenna port of the DMRS.
这样,在协议静态定义了或者高层信令配置了PT-RS时域映射规则的前提下,第一设备无需额外通知,第二设备便可根据其他参数(如MCS、DMRS的天线端口等)确定出承载第一参考信号(PT-RS)的符号,可以显著的节约信令开销。In this way, under the premise that the protocol statically defines or the high-level signaling is configured with the PT-RS time domain mapping rule, the first device can determine according to other parameters (such as MCS, DMRS antenna port, etc.) without additional notification. The symbol carrying the first reference signal (PT-RS) can significantly save signaling overhead.
应理解的,在上行传输过程中,第一设备可以是终端设备,第二设备可以是网络设备。在下行传输过程中,第一设备可以是网络设备,第二设备可以是终端设备。可选的,第一设备、第二设备均可以是终端设备,也均可以是网络设备。It should be understood that in the uplink transmission process, the first device may be a terminal device, and the second device may be a network device. In the downlink transmission process, the first device may be a network device, and the second device may be a terminal device. Optionally, the first device and the second device may both be terminal devices, and may also be network devices.
实施图8所示的信号传输方法,通过在前载DMRS之前的符号上映射第一参考信号(PT-RS),可确保映射在DMRS之前的符号上的数据信道也会有PT-RS映射,从而保证相噪估计性能。By implementing the signal transmission method shown in FIG. 8, by mapping the first reference signal (PT-RS) on the symbol before the pre-loaded DMRS, it can be ensured that the data channel mapped on the symbol before the DMRS also has a PT-RS mapping. Thereby ensuring phase noise estimation performance.
下面通过多个实施例详细介绍在时域上如何映射PT-RS。How to map a PT-RS in the time domain is described in detail below through various embodiments.
(一)实施例一(1) Embodiment 1
本实施例中,PTRS映射在时域单元内承载数据信号(PDSCH/PUSCH)的第1个符号上。可选的,在时域单元内,按照符号索引值递增的顺序,PTRS映射在每L个符号中索引最小的符号上。即从承载数据信号的第1个符号开始,PT-RS可以均匀映射在时域单元内。L是PTRS的符号级时域密度的倒数,L的取值可以根据PTRS的符号级时域密度确定,例如可能取值为{1,2,4}。In this embodiment, the PTRS mapping is carried on the first symbol of the data signal (PDSCH/PUSCH) in the time domain unit. Optionally, in the time domain unit, the PTRS maps the smallest symbol in each L symbols in the order in which the symbol index values are incremented. That is, starting from the first symbol carrying the data signal, the PT-RS can be uniformly mapped in the time domain unit. L is the reciprocal of the symbol-level time domain density of the PTRS, and the value of L can be determined according to the symbol-level time domain density of the PTRS, for example, the value may be {1, 2, 4}.
本申请中,时域单元可以为时隙,或聚合时隙,或子帧,或传输时间间隔(Transmission Time Interval,TTI)等。In this application, the time domain unit may be a time slot, or an aggregation time slot, or a subframe, or a Transmission Time Interval (TTI) or the like.
本实施例中,承载PT-RS的符号的索引l可以通过下述公式表示:In this embodiment, the index l of the symbol carrying the PT-RS can be expressed by the following formula:
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000003
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000003
其中,l'是正整数,l′=0,1,2,…;
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000004
表示承载数据信号(PDSCH/PUSCH)的第1个符号的索引,L表示PTRS的符号级时域密度的倒数。
Where l' is a positive integer, l'=0, 1, 2,...;
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000004
Indicates the index of the first symbol carrying the data signal (PDSCH/PUSCH), and L represents the reciprocal of the symbol-level time domain density of the PTRS.
本实施例中,PTRS的映射优先级低于以下至少一项:物理下行控制信道(PDCCH),物理上行控制信道(PUCCH),同步信号(SS block),信道状态信息参考信号(CSI-RS),探测参考信号(SRS),解调参考信号(DMRS),物理广播信道(PBCH)。这里,映射优先 级低于PDCCH/PUCCH/SS block/CSI-RS/SRS/DMRS是指:若按照PTRS时频域映射规则,需映射PTRS的资源单元(RE)上也需要映射PDCCH/PUCCH/SS block/CSI-RS/SRS/DMRS等这些特殊信号,则在该资源单元上不映射PTRS。可以理解地,若每L个符号中索引最小的符号上映射有这些特殊信号,则在映射这些特殊信号的RE上不映射PTRS。可以理解地,若按照PTRS时域映射规则,需映射PTRS的一个或多个符号上的所有子载波均映射有这些特殊信号,则在该一个或多个符号上不映射PTRS。In this embodiment, the mapping priority of the PTRS is lower than at least one of the following: a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH), a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH), a synchronization signal (SS block), and a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS). , Sounding Reference Signal (SRS), Demodulation Reference Signal (DMRS), Physical Broadcast Channel (PBCH). Here, the mapping priority is lower than the PDCCH/PUCCH/SS block/CSI-RS/SRS/DMRS means that if the PTRS time-frequency domain mapping rule is used, the PDCCH/PUCCH/ needs to be mapped on the resource unit (RE) to which the PTRS needs to be mapped. These special signals, such as SS block/CSI-RS/SRS/DMRS, do not map PTRS on this resource unit. It can be understood that if these special signals are mapped on the symbol with the smallest index among every L symbols, the PTRS is not mapped on the REs that map these special signals. It can be understood that if all the subcarriers on one or more symbols of the PTRS to be mapped are mapped with these special signals according to the PTRS time domain mapping rule, the PTRS is not mapped on the one or more symbols.
可选地,若按照PTRS时频域映射规则,需映射PTRS的资源单元(RE)上也需要映射PDCCH/PUCCH/SS block/CSI-RS/SRS/DMRS等这些特殊信号,则在该资源单元上发送零功率PTRS(ZP-PTRS),或发送静默PTRS(Muted-PTRS)。Optionally, if the special signal such as PDCCH/PUCCH/SS block/CSI-RS/SRS/DMRS needs to be mapped on the resource unit (RE) of the PTRS to be mapped according to the PTRS time-frequency domain mapping rule, the resource unit is Send zero-power PTRS (ZP-PTRS) or send silent PTRS (Muted-PTRS).
以下行传输为例,图9A-9L和图10A-10L示例性的示出了本实施例提供的PTRS时域映射规则的示意图。图9A-9L和图10A-10L示例性的示出了几种典型的不同的DMRS配置或不同的PDCCH配置或不同的PDSCH配置下,按照本实施例提供的PTRS时域映射规则所映射出的PTRS映射示意图。The following line transmission is taken as an example. FIGS. 9A-9L and FIGS. 10A-10L exemplarily show schematic diagrams of the PTRS time domain mapping rules provided by this embodiment. 9A-9L and FIG. 10A-10L exemplarily illustrate the mapping of PTRS time domain mapping rules according to the present embodiment, which are different DMRS configurations or different PDCCH configurations or different PDSCH configurations. Schematic diagram of PTRS mapping.
在图9A-9L的示例中,PTRS的时域密度为1/2,即L=2。下面以图9A和图9B为例进行说明。图9C-9L的PTRS时域映射可以从图看出,这里不赘述。In the example of Figures 9A-9L, the time domain density of the PTRS is 1/2, i.e., L = 2. 9A and 9B will be described below as an example. The PTRS time domain mapping of Figures 9C-9L can be seen from the figure and will not be described here.
如图9A所示,前载DMRS映射在符号3上,即第二符号是符号3。附加DMRS映射在符号7上。PDCCH和PDSCH以频分复用的方式共享符号0-2,即承载前载DMRS之前的符号。时域单元(即时隙)内的后面5个符号(即符号9-13)没有映射PDSCH,即符号9-13不承载下行数据信号。在图9A的示例中,在时域单元(即时隙)内,PTRS映射在承载数据信号的第1个符号(即符号0)上。且按照符号索引递增的顺序,PTRS映射在每2(L=2)个符号中索引最小的符号上。最终,PTRS映射在符号0、符号2、符号4、符号6和符号8上。As shown in FIG. 9A, the preloaded DMRS is mapped on symbol 3, that is, the second symbol is symbol 3. The additional DMRS is mapped on symbol 7. The PDCCH and the PDSCH share the symbol 0-2 in a frequency division multiplexing manner, that is, the symbol before the pre-loaded DMRS is carried. The last 5 symbols (i.e., symbols 9-13) in the time domain unit (i.e., slot) do not map PDSCH, i.e., symbols 9-13 do not carry downlink data signals. In the example of Figure 9A, within the time domain unit (i.e., time slot), the PTRS is mapped on the first symbol (i.e., symbol 0) that carries the data signal. And in the order in which the symbol indices are incremented, the PTRS map is on the symbol with the smallest index in every 2 (L=2) symbols. Finally, the PTRS is mapped on symbol 0, symbol 2, symbol 4, symbol 6, and symbol 8.
如图9B所示,前载DMRS映射在符号2上,即第二符号是符号2。附加DMRS映射在符号7上。PDCCH和PDSCH以频分复用的方式共享符号0-1,即承载前载DMRS之前的符号。时域单元(即时隙)内的后面5个符号(即符号9-13)没有映射PDSCH,即符号9-13不承载下行数据信号。在图9B的示例中,在时域单元(即时隙)内,PT-RS映射在承载数据信号的第1个符号(即符号0)上。且按照符号索引递增的顺序,PT-RS映射在每2(L=2)个符号中索引最小的符号上。最终,PT-RS需要映射在符号0、符号2、符号4、符号6和符号8上。由于DMRS需要映射在符号2上,DMRS的映射优先级高于PT-RS的映射优先级,因此,符号2上实际不映射PT-RS。As shown in FIG. 9B, the preloaded DMRS is mapped on symbol 2, that is, the second symbol is symbol 2. The additional DMRS is mapped on symbol 7. The PDCCH and the PDSCH share the symbol 0-1 in a frequency division multiplexing manner, that is, the symbol before the pre-loaded DMRS is carried. The last 5 symbols (i.e., symbols 9-13) in the time domain unit (i.e., slot) do not map PDSCH, i.e., symbols 9-13 do not carry downlink data signals. In the example of Figure 9B, within the time domain unit (i.e., time slot), the PT-RS is mapped on the first symbol (i.e., symbol 0) carrying the data signal. And in the order in which the symbol indices are incremented, the PT-RS maps on the symbol with the smallest index in every 2 (L=2) symbols. Finally, the PT-RS needs to be mapped on symbol 0, symbol 2, symbol 4, symbol 6 and symbol 8. Since the DMRS needs to be mapped on the symbol 2, the mapping priority of the DMRS is higher than the mapping priority of the PT-RS, and therefore, the PT-RS is not actually mapped on the symbol 2.
在图10A-10L的示例中,PTRS的时域密度为1/4,即L=4。下面以图10A和图10B为例进行说明。图10C-10L的PTRS时域映射可以从图看出,这里不赘述。In the example of Figures 10A-10L, the time domain density of the PTRS is 1/4, i.e., L = 4. 10A and 10B will be described below as an example. The PTRS time domain mapping of Figures 10C-10L can be seen from the figure and will not be described here.
如图10A所示,前载DMRS映射在符号3上,即第二符号是符号3。附加DMRS映射在符号7上。PDCCH和PDSCH以频分复用的方式共享符号0-2,即承载前载DMRS之前的符号。时域单元(即时隙)内的后面5个符号(即符号9-13)没有映射PDSCH,即符号9-13不承载下行数据信号。在图10A的示例中,在时域单元(即时隙)内,PTRS映射在承载数据信号的第1个符号(即符号0)上。且按照符号索引递增的顺序,PTRS映射在每4(L=4)个符号中索引最小的符号上。最终,PTRS映射在符号0、符号4和符号8上。As shown in FIG. 10A, the preloaded DMRS is mapped on symbol 3, that is, the second symbol is symbol 3. The additional DMRS is mapped on symbol 7. The PDCCH and the PDSCH share the symbol 0-2 in a frequency division multiplexing manner, that is, the symbol before the pre-loaded DMRS is carried. The last 5 symbols (i.e., symbols 9-13) in the time domain unit (i.e., slot) do not map PDSCH, i.e., symbols 9-13 do not carry downlink data signals. In the example of FIG. 10A, within a time domain unit (ie, a time slot), the PTRS is mapped on the first symbol (ie, symbol 0) that carries the data signal. And in the order in which the symbol index is incremented, the PTRS map is on the symbol with the smallest index among every 4 (L=4) symbols. Finally, the PTRS is mapped on symbol 0, symbol 4, and symbol 8.
如图10B所示,前载DMRS映射在符号3上,即第二符号是符号3。附加DMRS映射在符号8上。PDCCH和PDSCH以频分复用的方式共享符号0-2,即承载前载DMRS之前 的符号。时域单元(即时隙)内的后面5个符号(即符号9-13)没有映射PDSCH,即符号9-13不承载下行数据信号。在图10B的示例中,在时域单元(即时隙)内,PT-RS映射在承载数据信号的第1个符号(即符号0)上。且按照符号索引递增的顺序,PT-RS映射在每4(L=4)个符号中索引最小的符号上。最终,PT-RS需要映射在符号0、符号4和符号8上。由于DMRS需要映射在符号8上,DMRS的映射优先级高于PT-RS的映射优先级,因此,符号8上实际不映射PT-RS。As shown in FIG. 10B, the preloaded DMRS is mapped on symbol 3, that is, the second symbol is symbol 3. The additional DMRS is mapped on symbol 8. The PDCCH and the PDSCH share the symbol 0-2 in a frequency division multiplexing manner, that is, the symbol before the pre-loaded DMRS is carried. The last 5 symbols (i.e., symbols 9-13) in the time domain unit (i.e., slot) do not map PDSCH, i.e., symbols 9-13 do not carry downlink data signals. In the example of FIG. 10B, within the time domain unit (ie, the time slot), the PT-RS is mapped on the first symbol (ie, symbol 0) carrying the data signal. And in the order in which the symbol index is incremented, the PT-RS maps on the symbol with the smallest index among every 4 (L=4) symbols. Finally, the PT-RS needs to be mapped on symbol 0, symbol 4 and symbol 8. Since the DMRS needs to be mapped on the symbol 8, the mapping priority of the DMRS is higher than the mapping priority of the PT-RS, and therefore, the PT-RS is not actually mapped on the symbol 8.
需要说明的,图9A-9L和图10A-10L仅仅示例性的示出了本实施例的一些实现方式,实际应用中,映射DMRS的资源(子载波和符号)、映射PDCCH的资源(子载波和符号)、映射PDSCH的资源(子载波和符号)等等还可以不同,不应构成限定。It should be noted that, FIG. 9A-9L and FIG. 10A - 10L only exemplarily show some implementation manners of this embodiment. In practical applications, resources (subcarriers and symbols) of DMRS and resources of PDCCH (subcarriers) are mapped. The sum symbol), the resources (subcarriers and symbols) that map the PDSCH, and the like may also be different and should not be construed as limiting.
从上可以看出,实施例一提供的PT-RS时域映射规则从数据信道的第一个符号开始映射PTRS,确保映射在承载前载DMRS的符号之前的数据信道也会有PTRS映射,从而保证相噪估计性能。而且,通过确立PTRS与其他参考信号、物理信道等特殊信号的映射优先级,在PTRS的映射资源与其他参考信号、物理信道等特殊信号发生资源冲突时,可以通过不映射PTRS的方式避免冲突。As can be seen from the above, the PT-RS time domain mapping rule provided in the first embodiment maps the PTRS from the first symbol of the data channel, and ensures that the data channel before the symbol carrying the pre-loaded DMRS also has a PTRS mapping, thereby Guarantee phase noise estimation performance. Moreover, by establishing a mapping priority between a PTRS and a special signal such as a reference signal or a physical channel, when a PTRS mapping resource conflicts with a special signal such as another reference signal or a physical channel, the collision can be avoided by not mapping the PTRS.
(二)实施例二(2) Example 2
本实施例中,在时域单元内,承载PTRS的符号的位置可以与承载前载DMRS的符号(即第二符号)的位置,以及承载数据信号(PDSCH/PUSCH)的第1个符号和最后一个符号有关。这里,承载数据信号的第1个符号是指时域单元内承载数据信号(PDSCH/PUSCH)的符号中索引最小的符号。承载数据信号的最后一个符号是指时域单元内承载数据信号(PDSCH/PUSCH)的符号中索引最大的符号。In this embodiment, in the time domain unit, the location of the symbol carrying the PTRS may be the location of the symbol carrying the pre-loaded DMRS (ie, the second symbol), and the first symbol and finally of the bearer data signal (PDSCH/PUSCH). A symbol related. Here, the first symbol carrying the data signal refers to a symbol having the smallest index among the symbols of the bearer data signal (PDSCH/PUSCH) in the time domain unit. The last symbol carrying the data signal refers to the symbol with the largest index among the symbols of the bearer data signal (PDSCH/PUSCH) in the time domain unit.
本申请中,时域单元可以为时隙,或聚合时隙,或子帧,或传输时间间隔(Transmission Time Interval,TTI)等。In this application, the time domain unit may be a time slot, or an aggregation time slot, or a subframe, or a Transmission Time Interval (TTI) or the like.
具体的,在时域单元内,PTRS可以映射在第二符号(即承载前载DMRS的符号)之前的承载数据信号的第一个符号上。而且,在第二符号之前,按照符号索引值递增的顺序,PTRS可以映射在每L个符号中索引最小的符号上。也即是说,从承载数据信号的第1个符号开始,PT-RS可以按照符号索引值递增的顺序,均匀映射在第二符号之前的符号上。L是PTRS的符号级时域密度的倒数,L的取值可以根据PTRS的符号级时域密度确定,例如可能取值为{1,2,4}。Specifically, in the time domain unit, the PTRS may be mapped on the first symbol of the bearer data signal before the second symbol (ie, the symbol carrying the pre-loaded DMRS). Moreover, before the second symbol, in the order in which the symbol index values are incremented, the PTRS can be mapped on the symbol with the smallest index among every L symbols. That is to say, starting from the first symbol carrying the data signal, the PT-RS can be uniformly mapped on the symbol preceding the second symbol in the order in which the symbol index values are incremented. L is the reciprocal of the symbol-level time domain density of the PTRS, and the value of L can be determined according to the symbol-level time domain density of the PTRS, for example, the value may be {1, 2, 4}.
具体的,在时域单元内,PTRS可以映射在第二符号(即承载前载DMRS的符号)之后的承载数据信号的最后一个符号上。而且,在第二符号之后,按照符号索引值递减的顺序,PTRS可以映射在每L个符号中索引最大的符号上。也即是说,从承载数据信号的最后1个符号开始,PT-RS可以按照符号索引值递减的顺序,均匀映射在第二符号之后的符号上。L是PTRS的符号级时域密度的倒数,L的取值可以根据PTRS的符号级时域密度确定,例如可能取值为{1,2,4}。Specifically, in the time domain unit, the PTRS may be mapped on the last symbol of the bearer data signal after the second symbol (ie, the symbol carrying the pre-loaded DMRS). Moreover, after the second symbol, in the order in which the symbol index values are decremented, the PTRS can be mapped on the symbol with the largest index among every L symbols. That is to say, starting from the last symbol of the bearer data signal, the PT-RS can be uniformly mapped on the symbol following the second symbol in descending order of the symbol index value. L is the reciprocal of the symbol-level time domain density of the PTRS, and the value of L can be determined according to the symbol-level time domain density of the PTRS, for example, the value may be {1, 2, 4}.
本实施例中,承载PT-RS的符号的索引l可以通过下述公式表示:In this embodiment, the index l of the symbol carrying the PT-RS can be expressed by the following formula:
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000005
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000005
其中,l'是正整数,l′=0,1,2,…;
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000006
表示承载数据信号(PDSCH/PUSCH)的第1个符号的索引,
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000007
表示承载数据信号(PDSCH/PUSCH)的最后1个符号的索引,L表 示PTRS的符号级时域密度的倒数。其中,l DM-RS表示是前载DMRS的最后一个符号,l 0表示前载DMRS的第1个符号。例如,当DMRS是一个符号时,l DM-RS等于l 0;当DMRS是两个符号时,l DM-RS等于l 0+1。
Where l' is a positive integer, l'=0, 1, 2,...;
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000006
An index indicating the first symbol of the bearer data signal (PDSCH/PUSCH),
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000007
Indicates the index of the last symbol of the bearer data signal (PDSCH/PUSCH), and L represents the reciprocal of the symbol-level time domain density of the PTRS. Wherein, l DM-RS indicates the last symbol of the preloaded DMRS, and l 0 indicates the first symbol of the preloaded DMRS. For example, when DMRS is one symbol, l DM-RS is equal to l 0 ; when DMRS is two symbols, l DM-RS is equal to l 0 +1.
以下行传输为例,图11A-11C示例性的示出了本实施例提供的PTRS时域映射规则的示意图。图11A-11C示例性的示出了几种典型的不同的DMRS配置或不同的PDCCH配置或不同的PDSCH配置下,按照本实施例提供的PTRS时域映射规则所映射出的PTRS映射示意图。The following line transmission is taken as an example. FIG. 11A-11C exemplarily shows a schematic diagram of the PTRS time domain mapping rule provided by this embodiment. 11A-11C exemplarily show a PTRS mapping diagram mapped by a PTRS time domain mapping rule according to the present embodiment, in which several typical different DMRS configurations or different PDCCH configurations or different PDSCH configurations are used.
在图11A的示例中,PTRS的时域密度为1,即L=1。In the example of FIG. 11A, the time domain density of the PTRS is 1, that is, L=1.
如图11A所示,前载DMRS映射在符号1上,即第二符号是符号1。PDCCH和PDSCH以频分复用的方式共享符号0,即承载前载DMRS之前的符号。在图11A的示例中,在符号1之前,PTRS映射在承载数据信号的第1个符号(即符号0)上。在符号1之后,PTRS映射在承载数据信号的最后1个符号(即符号13)上,且按照符号索引递的顺序,映射在每1(L=1)个符号中索引最大的符号上。最终,PTRS映射在符号0、符号2-13上。As shown in FIG. 11A, the preloaded DMRS is mapped on symbol 1, that is, the second symbol is symbol 1. The PDCCH and the PDSCH share the symbol 0 in a frequency division multiplexing manner, that is, the symbol before the pre-loaded DMRS is carried. In the example of FIG. 11A, prior to symbol 1, the PTRS is mapped on the first symbol (ie, symbol 0) that carries the data signal. After symbol 1, the PTRS is mapped on the last symbol (i.e., symbol 13) carrying the data signal, and is mapped on the symbol with the largest index among every 1 (L = 1) symbols in the order in which the symbol index is handed. Finally, the PTRS is mapped on symbol 0, symbol 2-13.
在图11B的示例中,PTRS的时域密度为1/2,即L=2。In the example of FIG. 11B, the time domain density of the PTRS is 1/2, that is, L=2.
如图11B所示,前载DMRS映射在符号1上,即第二符号是符号2。PDCCH和PDSCH以频分复用的方式共享符号0和符号1,即承载前载DMRS之前的符号。在图11B的示例中,在符号2之前,PTRS映射在承载数据信号的第1个符号(即符号0)上。在符号2之后,PTRS映射在承载数据信号的最后1个符号(即符号13)上,且按照符号索引递减的顺序,映射在每2(L=2)个符号中索引最大的符号上。最终,PTRS映射在符号0、符号3、符号5、符号7、符号9、符号11和符号13上。As shown in FIG. 11B, the preloaded DMRS is mapped on symbol 1, that is, the second symbol is symbol 2. The PDCCH and the PDSCH share the symbol 0 and the symbol 1 in a frequency division multiplexing manner, that is, the symbols before the pre-loaded DMRS are carried. In the example of FIG. 11B, prior to symbol 2, the PTRS is mapped on the first symbol (ie, symbol 0) carrying the data signal. After symbol 2, the PTRS map is on the last symbol (i.e., symbol 13) carrying the data signal, and is mapped on the symbol with the largest index per 2 (L = 2) symbols in descending order of the symbol index. Finally, the PTRS is mapped on symbol 0, symbol 3, symbol 5, symbol 7, symbol 9, symbol 11, and symbol 13.
在图11C的示例中,PTRS的时域密度为1/4,即L=4。In the example of FIG. 11C, the time domain density of the PTRS is 1/4, that is, L=4.
如图11C所示,前载DMRS映射在符号1上,即第二符号是符号3。PDCCH和PDSCH以频分复用的方式共享符号0-2,即承载前载DMRS之前的符号。在图11C的示例中,在符号3之前,PTRS映射在承载数据信号的第1个符号(即符号0)上。在符号3之后,PTRS映射在承载数据信号的最后1个符号(即符号13)上,且按照符号索引递减的顺序,映射在每4(L=4)个符号中索引最大的符号上。最终,PTRS映射在符号0、符号5、符号9和符号13上。As shown in FIG. 11C, the preloaded DMRS is mapped on symbol 1, that is, the second symbol is symbol 3. The PDCCH and the PDSCH share the symbol 0-2 in a frequency division multiplexing manner, that is, the symbol before the pre-loaded DMRS is carried. In the example of FIG. 11C, prior to symbol 3, the PTRS is mapped on the first symbol (ie, symbol 0) that carries the data signal. After symbol 3, the PTRS is mapped on the last symbol (i.e., symbol 13) carrying the data signal, and is mapped on the symbol with the largest index among every 4 (L = 4) symbols in descending order of the symbol index. Finally, the PTRS is mapped on symbol 0, symbol 5, symbol 9 and symbol 13.
需要说明的,图11A-11C仅仅示例性的示出了本实施例的一些实现方式,实际应用中,映射DMRS的资源(子载波和符号)、映射PDCCH的资源(子载波和符号)、映射PDSCH的资源(子载波和符号)等等还可以不同,不应构成限定。11A-11C exemplarily shows some implementation manners of the present embodiment. In practical applications, resources (subcarriers and symbols) of DMRS, resources (subcarriers and symbols) mapped to PDCCH, and mapping are mapped. The resources (subcarriers and symbols) of the PDSCH and the like may also be different and should not be construed as limiting.
类似实施例一,本实施例中,PTRS的映射优先级低于以下至少一项:物理下行控制信道(PDCCH),物理上行控制信道(PUCCH),同步信号(SS block),信道状态信息参考信号(CSI-RS),探测参考信号(SRS),解调参考信号(DMRS),物理广播信道(PBCH)。Similar to the first embodiment, in this embodiment, the mapping priority of the PTRS is lower than at least one of the following: a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH), a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH), a synchronization signal (SS block), and a channel state information reference signal. (CSI-RS), Sounding Reference Signal (SRS), Demodulation Reference Signal (DMRS), Physical Broadcast Channel (PBCH).
从上可以看出,实施例二提供的PT-RS时域映射规则从数据信道的第一个符号和最后一个符号开始向中间符号映射PTRS,确保在数据信道的边缘符号上映射有PTRS,从而保证了PTRS的内插估计性能,而且确保映射在承载前载DMRS的符号之前的数据信道也会有PTRS映射,从而保证相噪估计性能。As can be seen from the above, the PT-RS time domain mapping rule provided in Embodiment 2 maps the PTRS from the first symbol and the last symbol of the data channel to the intermediate symbol, ensuring that the PTRS is mapped on the edge symbol of the data channel, thereby The interpolation estimation performance of the PTRS is guaranteed, and the data channel before the mapping of the pre-loaded DMRS symbol is also guaranteed to have a PTRS mapping, thereby ensuring phase noise estimation performance.
(三)实施例三(III) Third embodiment
本实施例中,承载PTRS的符号的位置可以与承载前载DMRS的符号(即第二符号) 的位置有关。可选地,承载PTRS的符号的位置还与承载前载DMRS的符号(即第二符号)、时域单元内符号索引小于承载前载DMRS的第1个符号的索引的符号个数、时域单元内符号索引大于前载DMRS的最后1个符号的索引的符号个数有关。In this embodiment, the location of the symbol carrying the PTRS may be related to the location of the symbol carrying the pre-loaded DMRS (ie, the second symbol). Optionally, the location of the symbol carrying the PTRS is also the symbol carrying the pre-loaded DMRS (ie, the second symbol), the symbol index in the time domain unit is smaller than the number of symbols of the index of the first symbol carrying the pre-loaded DMRS, and the time domain. The intra-unit symbol index is related to the number of symbols of the index of the last symbol of the pre-loaded DMRS.
本申请中,时域单元可以为时隙,或聚合时隙,或子帧,或传输时间间隔(Transmission Time Interval,TTI)等。In this application, the time domain unit may be a time slot, or an aggregation time slot, or a subframe, or a Transmission Time Interval (TTI) or the like.
具体的,在时域单元内,在第二符号之前的承载PTRS的最后一个符号的索引与第一差值相关。而且,从承载PTRS的最后一个符号的索引开始,PTRS按照符号索引递减的顺序,均匀映射在第二符号之前的承载数据信号的符号上。具体的,在时域单元内,在第二符号之前的承载PTRS的符号的索引与第一差值有关。这里,第一差值(H2)为承载前载DMRS的第一个符号的索引(l 0)和承载数据信号(PDSCH/PUSCH)的第一个符号的索引的差值。这里,均匀映射是指按照PTRS时域密度1/L均匀映射。L是PTRS的符号级时域密度的倒数,L的取值可以根据PTRS的符号级时域密度确定,例如可能取值为{1,2,4}。 Specifically, in the time domain unit, the index of the last symbol carrying the PTRS before the second symbol is related to the first difference. Moreover, starting from the index of the last symbol carrying the PTRS, the PTRS is uniformly mapped on the symbol of the bearer data signal preceding the second symbol in descending order of the symbol index. Specifically, in the time domain unit, the index of the symbol carrying the PTRS before the second symbol is related to the first difference. Here, the first difference (H2) is the difference between the index of the first symbol carrying the pre-loaded DMRS (l 0 ) and the index of the first symbol of the bearer data signal (PDSCH/PUSCH). Here, uniform mapping refers to uniform mapping according to PTRS time domain density 1/L. L is the reciprocal of the symbol-level time domain density of the PTRS, and the value of L can be determined according to the symbol-level time domain density of the PTRS, for example, the value may be {1, 2, 4}.
具体的,在时域单元内,在第二符号之后的承载PTRS的第1个符号的索引与第二符号之后的符号个数相关。而且,从承载PTRS的第一个符号的索引开始,PTRS按照符号索引递增的顺序,均匀映射在第二符号之后的符号上。这里,均匀映射是指按照PTRS时域密度1/L均匀映射。L是PTRS的符号级时域密度的倒数,L的取值可以根据PTRS的符号级时域密度确定,例如可能取值为{1,2,4}。Specifically, in the time domain unit, the index of the first symbol carrying the PTRS after the second symbol is related to the number of symbols after the second symbol. Moreover, starting from the index of the first symbol carrying the PTRS, the PTRS is uniformly mapped on the symbol following the second symbol in the order in which the symbol index is incremented. Here, uniform mapping refers to uniform mapping according to PTRS time domain density 1/L. L is the reciprocal of the symbol-level time domain density of the PTRS, and the value of L can be determined according to the symbol-level time domain density of the PTRS, for example, the value may be {1, 2, 4}.
本申请中,第二符号之后的符号个数可以用H 1表示。第一差值可以用H2表示。承载前载DMRS的第1个符号的索引可用l 0表示,承载前载DMRS的最后1个符号的索引可用l DM-RS表示。本实施例中,承载PTRS的符号的位置和H 1,H 2有关。下面提供一些PTRS时域映射方式: In the present application, the number of symbols after the second symbol can be represented by H 1 . The first difference can be represented by H2. The index of the first symbol carrying the pre-loaded DMRS may be represented by l 0 , and the index of the last symbol carrying the pre-loaded DMRS may be represented by l DM-RS . In this embodiment, the position of the symbol carrying the PTRS is related to H 1 , H 2 . Here are some ways to map PTRS time domains:
(1)PTRS的时域密度为1/2,即L=2。(1) The time domain density of PTRS is 1/2, that is, L=2.
若位于前载DMRS之后的承载数据信号(PDSCH/PUSCH)的最后1个符号的索引与承载前载DMRS的最后1个符号的索引的差值H 1为奇数,则在索引为l DM-RS+1的符号上映射PTRS。可选的,从索引为l DM-RS+1的符号开始,PTRS可以按照符号索引递增的顺序,均匀映射在第二符号之后的符号上。若位于前载DMRS之前的承载数据信号(PDSCH/PUSCH)的第1个符号的索引与承载前载DMRS的第1个符号的索引的差值H 2为奇数,则在索引为l 0-1的符号上映射PTRS。可选的,从索引为l 0-1的符号开始,PTRS可以按照符号索引递减的顺序,均匀映射在第二符号之前的符号上。 If the difference H 1 between the index of the last symbol of the bearer data signal (PDSCH/PUSCH) after the pre-loaded DMRS and the index of the last symbol of the pre-loaded DMRS is an odd number, then the index is l DM-RS. The PTRS is mapped on the +1 symbol. Optionally, starting from a symbol with an index of l DM-RS +1, the PTRS may be uniformly mapped on the symbol following the second symbol in an increasing order of the symbol index. If the difference H 2 between the index of the first symbol of the bearer data signal (PDSCH/PUSCH) before the pre-loaded DMRS and the index of the first symbol of the pre-loaded DMRS is an odd number, the index is l 0 -1 Map the PTRS on the symbol. Optionally, starting from a symbol with an index of l 0 -1, the PTRS may be uniformly mapped on the symbol before the second symbol in descending order of the symbol index.
若位于前载DMRS之后的承载数据信号(PDSCH/PUSCH)的最后1个符号的索引与承载前载DMRS的最后1个符号的索引的差值H 1为偶数,则在索引为l DM-RS+2的符号上映射PTRS。可选的,从索引为l DM-RS+2的符号开始,PTRS可以按照符号索引递增的顺序,均匀映射在第二符号之后的符号上。若位于前载DMRS之前的承载数据信号(PDSCH/PUSCH)的第1个符号的索引与承载前载DMRS的第1个符号的索引的差值H 2为偶数,则在索引为l 0-2的符号上映射PTRS。可选的,从索引为l 0-2的符号开始,PTRS可以按照符号索引递减的顺序,均匀映射在第二符号之前的符号上。 If the difference H 1 between the index of the last symbol of the bearer data signal (PDSCH/PUSCH) after the pre-loaded DMRS and the index of the last symbol of the pre-loaded DMRS is even, the index is l DM-RS. PTRS is mapped on the +2 symbol. Optionally, starting from a symbol with an index of l DM-RS +2, the PTRS may be uniformly mapped on the symbol following the second symbol in an increasing order of the symbol index. If the difference H 2 between the index of the first symbol of the bearer data signal (PDSCH/PUSCH) before the pre-loaded DMRS and the index of the first symbol of the pre-loaded DMRS is even, the index is l 0 -2 Map the PTRS on the symbol. Optionally, starting from a symbol with an index of l 0 -2, the PTRS may be uniformly mapped on the symbol before the second symbol in descending order of the symbol index.
(2)PTRS的时域密度为1/4,即L=4。(2) The time domain density of PTRS is 1/4, that is, L=4.
若位于前载DMRS之后的承载数据信号(PDSCH/PUSCH)的最后1个符号的索引与承载前载DMRS的最后1个符号的索引的差值H 1是4的整数倍,则在索引为l DM-RS+4的符号上映射PTRS。可选的,从索引为l DM-RS+4的符号开始,PTRS可以按照符号索引递增 的顺序,均匀映射在第二符号之后的符号上。位于前载DMRS之前的承载数据信号(PDSCH/PUSCH)的第1个符号的索引与承载前载DMRS的第1个符号的索引的差值H 2为4的整数倍,则在索引为l 0-4的符号上映射PTRS。可选的,从索引为l 0-4的符号开始,PTRS可以按照符号索引递减的顺序,均匀映射在第二符号之前的符号上。 If the difference H 1 between the index of the last symbol of the bearer data signal (PDSCH/PUSCH) after the pre-loaded DMRS and the index of the last symbol of the pre-loaded DMRS is an integer multiple of 4, the index is PTRS is mapped on the symbol of DM-RS +4. Optionally, starting from a symbol with an index of l DM-RS +4, the PTRS may be uniformly mapped on the symbol following the second symbol in an increasing order of the symbol index. The difference H 2 between the index of the first symbol of the bearer data signal (PDSCH/PUSCH) before the pre-loaded DMRS and the index of the first symbol of the pre-loaded DMRS is an integer multiple of 4, and the index is l 0 PTRS is mapped on the -4 symbol. Optionally, starting from a symbol with an index of l 0 -4, the PTRS may be uniformly mapped on the symbol before the second symbol in descending order of the symbol index.
若位于前载DMRS之后的承载数据信号(PDSCH/PUSCH)的最后1个符号的索引与承载前载DMRS的最后1个符号的索引的差值H 1mod4=1,则在索引为l DM-RS+1的符号上映射PTRS。可选的,从索引为l DM-RS+4的符号开始,PTRS可以按照符号索引递增的顺序,均匀映射在第二符号之后的符号上。位于前载DMRS之前的承载数据信号(PDSCH/PUSCH)的第1个符号的索引与承载前载DMRS的第1个符号的索引的差值H 2mod4=2,则在索引为l 0-1的符号上映射PTRS。可选的,从索引为l 0-1的符号开始,PTRS可以按照符号索引递减的顺序,均匀映射在第二符号之前的符号上。 If the difference between the index of the last symbol of the bearer data signal (PDSCH/PUSCH) after the pre-loaded DMRS and the index of the last symbol of the pre-loaded DMRS is H 1 mod4=1, then the index is l DM- The PTRS is mapped on the symbol of RS +1. Optionally, starting from a symbol with an index of l DM-RS +4, the PTRS may be uniformly mapped on the symbol following the second symbol in an increasing order of the symbol index. The difference between the index of the first symbol of the bearer data signal (PDSCH/PUSCH) before the pre-loaded DMRS and the index of the first symbol of the pre-loaded DMRS is H 2 mod4=2, and the index is l 0 -1 Map the PTRS on the symbol. Optionally, starting from a symbol with an index of l 0 -1, the PTRS may be uniformly mapped on the symbol before the second symbol in descending order of the symbol index.
若位于前载DMRS之后的承载数据信号(PDSCH/PUSCH)的最后1个符号的索引与承载前载DMRS的最后1个符号的索引的差值H 1mod4=2,则在索引为l DM-RS+2的符号上映射PTRS。可选的,从索引为l DM-RS+2的符号开始,PTRS可以按照符号索引递增的顺序,均匀映射在第二符号之后的符号上。位于前载DMRS之前的承载数据信号(PDSCH/PUSCH)的第1个符号的索引与承载前载DMRS的第1个符号的索引的差值H 2mod4=2,则在索引为l 0-2的符号上映射PTRS。可选的,从索引为l 0-2的符号开始,PTRS可以按照符号索引递减的顺序,均匀映射在第二符号之前的符号上。 If the difference between the index of the last symbol of the bearer data signal (PDSCH/PUSCH) after the pre-loaded DMRS and the index of the last symbol of the pre-loaded DMRS is H 1 mod4=2, then the index is l DM- The PTRS is mapped on the symbol of RS + 2. Optionally, starting from a symbol with an index of l DM-RS +2, the PTRS may be uniformly mapped on the symbol following the second symbol in an increasing order of the symbol index. The difference between the index of the first symbol of the bearer data signal (PDSCH/PUSCH) before the pre-loaded DMRS and the index of the first symbol of the pre-loaded DMRS is H 2 mod4=2, and the index is l 0 -2 Map the PTRS on the symbol. Optionally, starting from a symbol with an index of l 0 -2, the PTRS may be uniformly mapped on the symbol before the second symbol in descending order of the symbol index.
若位于前载DMRS之后的承载数据信号(PDSCH/PUSCH)的最后1个符号的索引与承载前载DMRS的最后1个符号的索引的差值H 1mod4=3,则在索引为l DM-RS+3的符号上映射PTRS。可选的,从索引为l DM-RS+3的符号开始,PTRS可以按照符号索引递增的顺序,均匀映射在第二符号之后的符号上。位于前载DMRS之前的承载数据信号(PDSCH/PUSCH)的第1个符号的索引与承载前载DMRS的第1个符号的索引的差值H 2mod4=3,则在索引为l 0-3的符号上映射PTRS。可选的,从索引为l 0-3的符号开始,PTRS可以按照符号索引递减的顺序,均匀映射在第二符号之前的符号上。 If the difference between the index of the last symbol of the bearer data signal (PDSCH/PUSCH) after the pre-loaded DMRS and the index of the last symbol of the pre-loaded DMRS is H 1 mod4=3, then the index is l DM- The PTRS is mapped on the symbol of RS + 3. Optionally, starting from a symbol with an index of l DM-RS +3, the PTRS may uniformly map the symbols after the second symbol in an increasing order of the symbol index. The difference between the index of the first symbol of the bearer data signal (PDSCH/PUSCH) before the pre-loaded DMRS and the index of the first symbol of the pre-loaded DMRS is H 2 mod4=3, and the index is l 0 -3 Map the PTRS on the symbol. Optionally, starting from a symbol with an index of l 0 -3, the PTRS may be uniformly mapped on the symbol before the second symbol in descending order of the symbol index.
本实施例中,承载PT-RS的符号的索引l可以通过下述公式表示:In this embodiment, the index l of the symbol carrying the PT-RS can be expressed by the following formula:
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000008
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000008
或者,or,
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000009
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000009
其中,l'是正整数,l′=0,1,2,…;L表示PTRS的符号级时域密度的倒数;H 1表示第二符号之后的符号个数;H2表示前述第一差值;l 0表示承载前载DMRS的第1个符号的索引,l DM-RS表示承载前载DMRS的最后1个符号的索引。 Wherein, l 'is a positive integer, l' = 0,1,2, ...; L represents the reciprocal of the time domain symbol-level density of PTRS; H 1 represents the number of symbols after the second symbol; represents H2 of the first difference; l 0 indicates the index of the first symbol carrying the pre-loaded DMRS, and l DM-RS indicates the index of the last symbol of the pre-loaded DMRS.
以下行传输为例,图12A-12D示例性的示出了本实施例提供的PTRS时域映射规则的示意图。图12A-12D示例性的示出了几种典型的不同的DMRS配置或不同的PDCCH配置或不同的PDSCH配置下,按照本实施例提供的PTRS时域映射规则所映射出的PTRS映射示意图。The following line transmission is taken as an example. FIG. 12A-12D exemplarily shows a schematic diagram of the PTRS time domain mapping rule provided by this embodiment. FIG. 12A-12D exemplarily show PTRS mappings mapped by the PTRS time domain mapping rules according to the present embodiment, which are exemplified in several typical different DMRS configurations or different PDCCH configurations or different PDSCH configurations.
在图12A-12B的示例中,PTRS的时域密度为1/2,即L=2。In the example of Figures 12A-12B, the time domain density of the PTRS is 1/2, i.e., L = 2.
如图12A所示,前载DMRS映射在符号2上,即第二符号是符号2。PDCCH和PDSCH以频分复用的方式共享符号0-1,即承载前载DMRS之前的符号。在图12A的示例中,H 1=11,H 2=2。在符号2之前,PTRS映射在符号0上。在符号2之后,PTRS映射在符号3上,且按照符号索引递增的顺序,映射在每2(L=2)个符号中索引最小的符号上。最终,PTRS映射在符号0、符号3、符号5、符号7、符号9、符号11和符号13上。 As shown in FIG. 12A, the preloaded DMRS is mapped on symbol 2, that is, the second symbol is symbol 2. The PDCCH and the PDSCH share the symbol 0-1 in a frequency division multiplexing manner, that is, the symbol before the pre-loaded DMRS is carried. In the example of FIG. 12A, H 1 =11 and H 2 =2. Prior to symbol 2, the PTRS is mapped on symbol 0. After symbol 2, the PTRS is mapped on symbol 3, and in the order in which the symbol index is incremented, is mapped on the symbol with the smallest index among every 2 (L=2) symbols. Finally, the PTRS is mapped on symbol 0, symbol 3, symbol 5, symbol 7, symbol 9, symbol 11, and symbol 13.
如图12B所示,前载DMRS映射在符号3上,即第二符号是符号3。PDCCH和PDSCH以频分复用的方式共享符号0-2,即承载前载DMRS之前的符号。在图12A的示例中,H 1=10,H 2=3。在符号3之前,PTRS映射在符号2上。在符号3之后,PTRS映射在符号5上,且按照符号索引递增的顺序,映射在每2(L=2)个符号中索引最小的符号上。最终,PTRS映射在符号2、符号5、符号7、符号9、符号11和符号13上。 As shown in FIG. 12B, the preloaded DMRS is mapped on symbol 3, that is, the second symbol is symbol 3. The PDCCH and the PDSCH share the symbol 0-2 in a frequency division multiplexing manner, that is, the symbol before the pre-loaded DMRS is carried. In the example of Figure 12A, H 1 = 10 and H 2 = 3. Prior to symbol 3, the PTRS is mapped on symbol 2. After symbol 3, the PTRS is mapped on symbol 5 and is mapped on the lowest index of every 2 (L=2) symbols in order of increasing symbol index. Finally, the PTRS is mapped on symbol 2, symbol 5, symbol 7, symbol 9, symbol 11 and symbol 13.
在图12C-12D的示例中,PTRS的时域密度为1/4,即L=4。In the example of Figures 12C-12D, the time domain density of the PTRS is 1/4, i.e., L = 4.
如图12C所示,前载DMRS映射在符号1上,即第二符号是符号1。PDCCH和PDSCH以频分复用的方式共享符号0,即承载前载DMRS之前的符号。在图12C的示例中,H 1=12,H 2=1。在符号1之前,PTRS映射在符号0上。在符号1之后,PTRS映射在符号5上,且按照符号索引递增的顺序,映射在每4(L=4)个符号中索引最小的符号上。最终,PTRS映射在符号0、符号5、符号9和符号13上。 As shown in FIG. 12C, the preloaded DMRS is mapped on symbol 1, that is, the second symbol is symbol 1. The PDCCH and the PDSCH share the symbol 0 in a frequency division multiplexing manner, that is, the symbol before the pre-loaded DMRS is carried. In the example of Figure 12C, H 1 = 12 and H 2 =1. Prior to symbol 1, the PTRS is mapped on symbol 0. After symbol 1, the PTRS is mapped on symbol 5 and is mapped on the lowest index of every 4 (L=4) symbols in order of increasing symbol index. Finally, the PTRS is mapped on symbol 0, symbol 5, symbol 9 and symbol 13.
如图12D所示,前载DMRS映射在符号2上,即第二符号是符号2。PDCCH和PDSCH以频分复用的方式共享符号0-1,即承载前载DMRS之前的符号。在图12D的示例中,H 1=11,H 2=2。在符号2之前,PTRS映射在符号0上。在符号2之后,PTRS映射在符号5上,且按照符号索引递增的顺序,映射在每4(L=4)个符号中索引最小的符号上。最终,PTRS映射在符号0、符号5、符号9和符号13上。 As shown in FIG. 12D, the preloaded DMRS is mapped on symbol 2, that is, the second symbol is symbol 2. The PDCCH and the PDSCH share the symbol 0-1 in a frequency division multiplexing manner, that is, the symbol before the pre-loaded DMRS is carried. In the example of Figure 12D, H 1 = 11 and H 2 = 2. Prior to symbol 2, the PTRS is mapped on symbol 0. After symbol 2, the PTRS is mapped on symbol 5, and in the order in which the symbol index is incremented, is mapped on the symbol with the smallest index among every 4 (L=4) symbols. Finally, the PTRS is mapped on symbol 0, symbol 5, symbol 9 and symbol 13.
需要说明的,图12A-12D仅仅示例性的示出了本实施例的一些实现方式,实际应用中,映射DMRS的资源(子载波和符号)、映射PDCCH的资源(子载波和符号)、映射PDSCH的资源(子载波和符号)等等还可以不同,不应构成限定。It should be noted that some implementations of this embodiment are only exemplarily shown in FIG. 12A-12D. In practical applications, resources (subcarriers and symbols) of DMRS, resources (subcarriers and symbols) mapped to PDCCH, and mapping are mapped. The resources (subcarriers and symbols) of the PDSCH and the like may also be different and should not be construed as limiting.
从上可以看出,实施例一提供的PT-RS时域映射规则通过将承载DMRS的符号的位置与承载PTRS的的符号的位置绑定,可以通过DMRS的时域映射图样确定出承载PTRS的符号的位置,节省信令开销。本实施例可以保证数据信道的最后一个符号上映射有PTRS,保证PTRS的内插估计性能,而且确保映射在承载前载DMRS的符号之前的数据信道也会有PTRS映射,从而保证相噪估计性能。As can be seen from the above, the PT-RS time domain mapping rule provided in the first embodiment can be used to determine the location of the symbol carrying the DMRS and the location of the symbol carrying the PTRS, and the PTRS can be determined by using the time domain mapping pattern of the DMRS. The location of the symbol saves signaling overhead. In this embodiment, the PTRS is mapped on the last symbol of the data channel to ensure the interpolation estimation performance of the PTRS, and the data channel before the symbol carrying the pre-loaded DMRS is also mapped with PTRS, thereby ensuring the phase noise estimation performance. .
在本申请的一些可选实施例中,在高层信令,比如RRC信令,中包括一组或者多组数据资源映射指示(PDSCH-RE-MappingConfig)信息,数据资源映射指示信息包括了数据资源映射指示信息的标识信息(pdsch-RE-MappingConfigId)和PTRS的时频资源位置的相关信息,相关信息可以比如指示相位跟踪参考信号的图案(PTRS pattern)和/或者相位跟踪参考信号的天线端口(PTRS port)等等。In some optional embodiments of the present application, one or more sets of data resource mapping indication (PDSCH-RE-MappingConfig) information is included in high layer signaling, such as RRC signaling, and the data resource mapping indication information includes data resources. Mapping information indicating information (pdsch-RE-MappingConfigId) of the information and information about the time-frequency resource location of the PTRS, and the related information may be, for example, a pattern indicating a phase tracking reference signal (PTRS pattern) and/or an antenna port of the phase tracking reference signal ( PTRS port) and so on.
一种具体的信令实现方式如下:A specific signaling implementation is as follows:
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000010
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000010
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000011
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000011
基于上述信令实现方式,示出了RRC信令中的一种数据资源映射指示信息所包括的内容。该数据资源映射指示信息包括了数据资源映射指示信息的标识信息(pdsch-RE-MappingConfigId)和PTRS的时频资源位置的相关信息,这里相关信息包括PTRS ports和/或PTRS pattern;或者PTRS port group。这里,PTRS ports表示PTRS的天线端口信息(例如,这里天线端口信息包括天线端口的端口号);PTRS pattern表示PTRS图案;或者PTRS port group表示PTRS天线端口组的信息。对于PTRS的时频资源位置的相关信息,可参见本申请下文中的具体描述。Based on the above signaling implementation manner, content included in one type of data resource mapping indication information in RRC signaling is shown. The data resource mapping indication information includes identification information of the data resource mapping indication information (pdsch-RE-MappingConfigId) and related information of the time-frequency resource location of the PTRS, where the related information includes PTRS ports and/or PTRS pattern; or PTRS port group . Here, PTRS ports represent antenna port information of the PTRS (for example, the antenna port information herein includes the port number of the antenna port); PTRS pattern indicates a PTRS pattern; or PTRS port group indicates information of the PTRS antenna port group. For information about the location of the time-frequency resource of the PTRS, refer to the detailed description below in this application.
本申请实施例中可选的,DCI中具体指示使用RRC配置的哪组数据资源映射指示信息。举例来说,可以是通过DCI中通过数据资源映射和准共址指示域(PDSCH RE Mapping and Quasi-Co-Location Indicator,PQI)的比特位来指示RRC信令中配置的数据资源映射指示信息的标识信息(例如,pdsch-RE-MappingConfigId)。一种具体的实现方式可以参见表1,表1中示例以2个bit表示数据资源映射和准共址指示域进行举例说明。Optionally, in the DCI, the DCI specifically indicates which group of data resource mapping indication information used by the RRC configuration. For example, the data resource mapping indication information configured in the RRC signaling may be indicated by the bits of the PDSCH RE Mapping and Quasi-Co-Location Indicator (PQI) in the DCI. Identification information (for example, pdsch-RE-MappingConfigId). For a specific implementation, refer to Table 1. The example in Table 1 illustrates the data resource mapping and quasi-co-location indication fields by 2 bits.
数据资源映射和准共址指示域(比特取值)Data resource mapping and quasi-co-location indication field (bit value) 描述description
0000 RRC配置的数据资源映射指示信息的标识1Identification of the data resource mapping indication information of the RRC configuration 1
0101 RRC配置的数据资源映射指示信息的标识2Identification of the data resource mapping indication information of the RRC configuration 2
1010 RRC配置的数据资源映射指示信息的标识3Identification of the data resource mapping indication information of the RRC configuration 3
1111 RRC配置的数据资源映射指示信息的标识4Identification of the data resource mapping indication information of the RRC configuration 4
表1Table 1
在此,数据资源映射和准共址指示域也可以理解为DCI携带的第二指示信息的一种具体实现方式。该第二指示信息通过指示对应的标识,进而能够确定RRC中与该标识对应的相位跟踪参考信号的时频资源位置的相关信息。例如,上述示例性的RRC信令中,数据资源映射指示信息的标识信息为标识1,DCI中数据资源映射和准共址指示域的比特取值为“00”,则可以确定DCI指示标识1中的相位跟踪参考信号的时频资源位置的相关信息,进而可以确定相关信息为PTRS ports ENUMERATED{7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,spare1},和/或PTRS pattern ENUMERATED{pattern 1,pattern 2};或者PTRS port group ENUMERATED{group编号1,group编号2,…}。Here, the data resource mapping and the quasi-co-location indication field can also be understood as a specific implementation manner of the second indication information carried by the DCI. The second indication information, by indicating the corresponding identifier, can further determine related information of the time-frequency resource location of the phase tracking reference signal corresponding to the identifier in the RRC. For example, in the above exemplary RRC signaling, the identifier information of the data resource mapping indication information is the identifier 1, and the bit value of the data resource mapping and the quasi-co-location indication field in the DCI is “00”, and the DCI indication identifier 1 may be determined. The phase tracking information of the phase-track resource of the reference signal can further determine that the relevant information is PTRS ports ENUMERATED {7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,spare1}, and/or PTRS pattern ENUMERATED {pattern 1,pattern 2}; or PTRS port group ENUMERATED{group number 1, group number 2, ...}.
可以理解的,接收端(即上述第二设备)获取数据资源映射指示信息中的PTRS的时频资源位置,即可知道数据不映射到所述PTRS的时频资源位置。即不会在所述PTRS的时频资源位置上进行数据接收。It can be understood that the receiving end (ie, the second device) obtains the time-frequency resource location of the PTRS in the data resource mapping indication information, that is, the data is not mapped to the time-frequency resource location of the PTRS. That is, data reception is not performed at the time-frequency resource location of the PTRS.
另外,本申请还提供了另一种信号传输方法,可以在非相干联合传输(non-coherent joint transmission,NCJT)场景下,在其他传输点(Transmitting receiving point,TRP)发送PTRS的资源上对数据做速率匹配(即不映射数据),可以避免不同的传输点发送的数据对PTRS造成的干扰,从而保证PTRS的相噪估计性能。In addition, the present application further provides another signal transmission method, which can be used to transmit data of PTRS at other transmission points (TRP) in a non-coherent joint transmission (NCJT) scenario. Rate matching (that is, no mapping of data) can avoid interference caused by data transmitted by different transmission points to PTRS, thereby ensuring phase noise estimation performance of PTRS.
首先,介绍非相干联合传输场景。First, introduce the non-coherent joint transmission scenario.
在LTE系统中,TM10支持多点协作传输(Coordination multiple point,CoMP)。在CoMP中,信号可能来自多个传输点,如图13所示,在非相干传输(NCJT)场景下,不同的传输点可以在相同的时频资源上向同一个终端设备传输不同的MIMO数据流(MIMO layers)。In the LTE system, the TM10 supports Coordination Multiple Point (CoMP). In CoMP, the signal may come from multiple transmission points. As shown in Figure 13, in a non-coherent transmission (NCJT) scenario, different transmission points can transmit different MIMO data to the same terminal device on the same time-frequency resource. MIMO layers.
为支持多点协作传输(coordination multiple point,CoMP),准共址(quasi-co-located,QCL)的概念被引入,要求天线端口满足一定的QCL限制。To support coordinated multiple point (CoMP), the concept of quasi-co-located (QCL) is introduced, requiring antenna ports to meet certain QCL limits.
在CoMP通信中,信号可能来自多个传输点(transmission point,TP,或者transmission reception point,TRP),CoMP中的天线端口需要满足QCL的限制。网络设备有时可能需要配置多组QCL信息通知终端设备。例如在非相干联合传输(non-coherent Joint Transmission,NCJT)情况下,由于不同的传输点(例如网络设备)可以在同一载波内相同的时频资源上传不同的多输入多输出(multiple-input multiple-output,MIMO)数据流(MIMO layers)给同一终端设备,因此,第一传输点上的解调参考信号(demodulation reference signal,DMRS)天线端口(有时也称为DMRS ports)与信道状态信息参考信号(channel state information reference signal,CSI-RS)天线端口(有时也称为CSI-RS ports)和/或PTRS为QCL的(即满足QCL关系),第二传输点上的DMRS天线端口与CSI-RS天线端口和/或PTRS为QCL的,而第一传输点和第二传输点之间的天线端口为非QCL的(即不满足QCL关系)。In CoMP communication, the signal may come from multiple transmission points (TPs) or transmission reception points (TRPs). The antenna ports in CoMP need to meet the QCL limit. Network devices may sometimes need to configure multiple sets of QCL information to notify the terminal device. For example, in the case of non-coherent joint transmission (NCJT), different transmission points (such as network devices) can upload different multiple-input multiple-output (multiple-input multiple) in the same time-frequency resource in the same carrier. -output, MIMO) MIMO layers are given to the same terminal device, therefore, demodulation reference signal (DMRS) antenna ports (sometimes called DMRS ports) and channel state information reference at the first transmission point Channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS) antenna port (sometimes called CSI-RS ports) and/or PTRS is QCL (ie, satisfying QCL relationship), DMRS antenna port and CSI- at the second transmission point The RS antenna port and/or PTRS is QCL, and the antenna port between the first transmission point and the second transmission point is non-QCL (ie, does not satisfy the QCL relationship).
本申请实施例中QCL的定义可以参考LTE中的定义,即从QCL的天线端口发送出的信号会经过相同的大尺度衰落,大尺度衰落包括以下一项或多项:时延扩展、多普勒扩展、多普勒频移、平均信道增益和平均时延等。本申请实施例中QCL的定义还可以参考5G中QCL的定义,在新无线NR系统中,对QCL的定义与LTE系统类似,但增加了空域信息,如:从QCL的天线端口发送出的信号会经过相同的大尺度衰落,其中,大尺度衰落包括以下参数中的一项或多项:时延扩展、多普勒扩展、多普勒频移、平均信道增益、平均时延和空域参数等,空域参数则可以为为如发射角(AOA)、主发射角(Dominant AoA)、平均到达角(Average AoA)、到达角(AOD)、信道相关矩阵,到达角的功率角度扩展谱,平均触发角(Average AoD)、出发角的功率角度扩展谱、发射信道相关性、接收信道相关性、发射波束成型、接收波束成型、空间信道相关性、滤波器,空间滤波参数,或,空间接收参数等中的一项等中的一项或多项。The definition of QCL in this embodiment may refer to the definition in LTE, that is, the signal sent from the antenna port of the QCL will undergo the same large-scale fading, and the large-scale fading includes one or more of the following: delay extension, Doppler Le expansion, Doppler shift, average channel gain, and average delay. The definition of QCL in the embodiment of the present application can also refer to the definition of QCL in 5G. In the new wireless NR system, the definition of QCL is similar to that of the LTE system, but the airspace information is added, for example, the signal sent from the antenna port of the QCL. Will undergo the same large-scale fading, where large-scale fading includes one or more of the following parameters: delay spread, Doppler spread, Doppler shift, average channel gain, average delay, and spatial parameters. The airspace parameter may be a power angle spread spectrum such as an emission angle (AOA), a main emission angle (Dominant AoA), an average arrival angle (Average AoA), an angle of arrival (AOD), a channel correlation matrix, an angle of arrival, and an average trigger. Angle AoD, power angle spread spectrum of the departure angle, transmit channel correlation, receive channel correlation, transmit beamforming, receive beamforming, spatial channel correlation, filters, spatial filtering parameters, or spatial receive parameters, etc. One or more of one of the items.
QCL关系包括满足QCL关系的信道状态信息参考信号(channel state information-reference signal,CSI-RS),DMRS,相位跟踪参考信号(phase tracking reference signal,PTRS)(也可称为相位补偿参考信号(phase compensation reference signal,PCRS),或,相位噪声参考信号(简称相噪参考信号)),同步块(SS block)(包括同步信号和广播信道中的一个或多个,同步信号包括主同步信号PSS和/或从同步信号SSS)中一个或多个,上行参考信号(如上行探测信号sounding reference signal,SRS,上行DMRS)。The QCL relationship includes a channel state information-reference signal (CSI-RS) that satisfies the QCL relationship, a DMRS, and a phase tracking reference signal (PTRS) (also referred to as a phase compensation reference signal (phase). Compensation reference signal (PCRS), or phase noise reference signal (referred to as phase noise reference signal), a synchronization block (SS block) (including one or more of a synchronization signal and a broadcast channel, the synchronization signal including the primary synchronization signal PSS and / or one or more of the synchronization signals SSS), the uplink reference signal (such as the sounding reference signal, SRS, uplink DMRS).
可以理解的,如果在传输点1(TRP1)发送PTRS的时频资源上,传输点2(TRP2)发送了数据,在多个传输点之间的回传链路为非理想回传链路时,两个传输点之间的PTRS的位置无法及时交互,则传输点2(TRP2)发送的数据会对传输点1(TRP1)发送的PTRS产生干扰,从而影响终端设备对传输点1(TRP1)发送的PTRS的接收性能。反之亦然,如果在传输点2(TRP2)发送PTRS的时频资源上,传输点1(TRP2)发送了数据,则传输点1(TRP1)发送的数据会对传输点2(TRP2)发送的PTRS产生干扰。It can be understood that if the transmission point 2 (TRP1) transmits the data on the time-frequency resource of the PTRS, the transmission point 2 (TRP2) transmits the data, and when the return link between the multiple transmission points is a non-ideal backhaul link, If the location of the PTRS between the two transmission points cannot be synchronized in time, the data transmitted by the transmission point 2 (TRP2) may interfere with the PTRS transmitted by the transmission point 1 (TRP1), thereby affecting the terminal equipment to the transmission point 1 (TRP1). Receive performance of the transmitted PTRS. Vice versa, if the transmission point 1 (TRP2) transmits data on the time-frequency resource of the transmission point 2 (TRP2) transmitting PTRS, the data transmitted by the transmission point 1 (TRP1) will be transmitted to the transmission point 2 (TRP2). PTRS creates interference.
下面详细说明解决上述技术问题的另一种信号传输方法。如图14所示,下面展开:Another signal transmission method that solves the above technical problems will be described in detail below. As shown in Figure 14, the following expansion:
1.网络设备1和网络设备2交互PTRS信息(即前述第一参考信号)映射资源集合。可选的,网络设备2可将PTRS信息通过X2接口发送给网络设备1,所述PTRS信息用于确定来自网络设备2的PTRS占用的时频资源,即网络设备2的PTRS映射资源集合。这里,网络设备2的PTRS映射资源集合是指网络设备2可能会传输PTRS的时频资源,但实际网络设备2可以仅在该集合中的部分资源上传输PTRS,或者实际网络设备2不传输PTRS。1. The network device 1 and the network device 2 exchange PTRS information (ie, the aforementioned first reference signal) mapping resource set. Optionally, the network device 2 may send the PTRS information to the network device 1 by using an X2 interface, where the PTRS information is used to determine a time-frequency resource occupied by the PTRS from the network device 2, that is, a PTRS mapping resource set of the network device 2. Here, the PTRS mapping resource set of the network device 2 refers to a time-frequency resource that the network device 2 may transmit the PTRS, but the actual network device 2 may transmit the PTRS only on some resources in the set, or the actual network device 2 does not transmit the PTRS. .
具体的,网络设备1和网络设备2之间需要互相通知各自的PTRS资源映射集合,例如互相告知各自的以下参数:PTRS的发送使能信息、PTRS的天线端口在DMRS Port group中关联的DMRS port的指示信息、DMRS port group的指示信息、或PTRS的频域密度与调度带宽门限值的关联关系的指示信息、PTRS的时域密度与MCS门限值的关联关系的指示信息等。Specifically, the network device 1 and the network device 2 need to notify each other of the respective PTRS resource mapping sets, for example, mutually inform each of the following parameters: the PTRS transmission enable information, and the PTRS antenna port associated with the DMRS Port group. The indication information, the indication information of the DMRS port group, the indication information of the association relationship between the frequency domain density of the PTRS and the scheduling bandwidth threshold, the indication information of the association relationship between the time domain density of the PTRS and the MCS threshold value, and the like.
类似的,网络设备1也可以将PTRS信息通过X2接口发送给网络设备2,本发明对此不做任何限定。Similarly, the network device 1 can also send the PTRS information to the network device 2 through the X2 interface, which is not limited in the present invention.
S201,网络设备1(或网络设备2)向终端设备发送第一指示信息。网络设备1(或网络设备2)发送的第一指示信息用于指示至少两组PTRS占用的时频资源的位置,每组PTRS与其他参考信号(例如,DMRS,CSI-RS,SS block,SRS等)具有一组QCL关系,对应一个网络设备,每组PTRS的QCL关系不同,即PTRS组与组之间是非QCL的。例如,PTRS天线端口组1内的天线端口满足第一QCL关系,PTRS天线端口组2内的天线端口满足第二QCL关系,其中,第一QCL关系与第二QCL关系不同。第一QCL关系,可以对网络设备1,第二QCL关系,可以对应网络设备2。本申请中,可以将该其他参考信号称为第三参考信号。S201. The network device 1 (or the network device 2) sends the first indication information to the terminal device. The first indication information sent by the network device 1 (or the network device 2) is used to indicate the location of the time-frequency resources occupied by the at least two groups of PTRSs, and each group of PTRSs and other reference signals (eg, DMRS, CSI-RS, SS block, SRS) Etc.) has a set of QCL relationships, corresponding to a network device, the QCL relationship of each group of PTRS is different, that is, the PTRS group and the group are non-QCL. For example, the antenna ports in the PTRS antenna port group 1 satisfy the first QCL relationship, and the antenna ports in the PTRS antenna port group 2 satisfy the second QCL relationship, wherein the first QCL relationship is different from the second QCL relationship. The first QCL relationship may correspond to the network device 1, and the second QCL relationship may correspond to the network device 2. In the present application, the other reference signal may be referred to as a third reference signal.
可选的,网络设备1(或网络设备2)向终端设备发送第一指示信息可以为高层信令或者,高层信令和物理层信令共同指示。例如,在高层信令,比如第一指示信息为RRC信令,RRC信令中包括至少两组数据资源映射指示(PDSCH-RE-MappingConfig)信息,数据资源映射指示信息包括了数据资源映射指示信息的标识信息(pdsch-RE-MappingConfigId)和PRTS的时频资源位置的相关信息,相关信息可以为指示PTRS的图案(DMRS pattern)和/或者PTRS的天线端口(DMRS port),或则PTRS组标识等等。Optionally, the first indication information that the network device 1 (or the network device 2) sends to the terminal device may be jointly indicated by the high layer signaling or the high layer signaling and the physical layer signaling. For example, in the high layer signaling, for example, the first indication information is RRC signaling, the RRC signaling includes at least two sets of data resource mapping indication (PDSCH-RE-MappingConfig) information, and the data resource mapping indication information includes the data resource mapping indication information. The identification information (pdsch-RE-MappingConfigId) and the information about the time-frequency resource location of the PRTS, the related information may be a DMRS pattern indicating a PTRS and/or an DMRS port of the PTRS, or a PTRS group identifier and many more.
一种具体的信令实现方式如下:A specific signaling implementation is as follows:
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000012
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000012
基于上述信令实现方式,示出了RRC信令中的一种数据资源映射指示信息所包括的内容,该数据资源映射指示信息包括了数据资源映射指示信息的标识信息(pdsch-RE-MappingConfigId)和PTRS的时频资源位置的相关信息,这里相关信息包括PTRS ports和/或PTRS pattern;或者PTRS port group。这里,PTRS ports表示PTRS的天线 端口信息(例如,这里天线端口信息包括天线端口的端口号);PTRS pattern表示DMRS图案;或者PTRS port group表示PTRS天线端口组的信息。对于PTRS的视频资源位置的相关信息,可参见本申请下文中的具体描述。Based on the signaling implementation manner, the content included in one of the data resource mapping indication information in the RRC signaling is displayed, where the data resource mapping indication information includes the identifier information of the data resource mapping indication information (pdsch-RE-MappingConfigId) Information about the location of the time-frequency resource of the PTRS, where the relevant information includes PTRS ports and/or PTRS pattern; or PTRS port group. Here, PTRS ports indicate antenna port information of the PTRS (for example, the antenna port information herein includes the port number of the antenna port); PTRS pattern indicates the DMRS pattern; or PTRS port group indicates information of the PTRS antenna port group. For information about the location of the video resource of the PTRS, refer to the detailed description below in this application.
本申请实施例中可选的,第一指示信息还可以为物理层信令DCI和高层信令。例如,物理层信令DCI中具体指示使用RRC配置的哪组数据资源映射指示信息。举例来说,可以是通过DCI中通过数据资源映射的比特位来指示RRC信令中配置的数据资源映射指示信息的标识信息(例如,pdsch-RE-MappingConfigId)。一种具体的实现方式可以参见表2,表2中示例以2个bit表示数据资源映射和准共址指示域进行举例说明。Optionally, the first indication information may also be physical layer signaling DCI and high layer signaling. For example, the physical layer signaling DCI specifically indicates which group of data resource mapping indication information used by the RRC configuration. For example, the identifier information (for example, pdsch-RE-MappingConfigId) of the data resource mapping indication information configured in the RRC signaling may be indicated by a bit mapped by the data resource in the DCI. For a specific implementation, refer to Table 2. The example in Table 2 illustrates the data resource mapping and quasi-co-location indication fields by 2 bits.
数据资源映射和准共址指示域(比特取值)Data resource mapping and quasi-co-location indication field (bit value) 描述description
0000 RRC配置的数据资源映射指示信息的标识1Identification of the data resource mapping indication information of the RRC configuration 1
0101 RRC配置的数据资源映射指示信息的标识2Identification of the data resource mapping indication information of the RRC configuration 2
1010 RRC配置的数据资源映射指示信息的标识3Identification of the data resource mapping indication information of the RRC configuration 3
1111 RRC配置的数据资源映射指示信息的标识4Identification of the data resource mapping indication information of the RRC configuration 4
表2Table 2
例如,上述示例性的RRC信令中,数据资源映射指示信息的标识信息为标识1,DCI中数据资源映射和准共址指示域的比特取值为“00”,则可以确定DCI指示标识1中的相位跟踪参考信号的时频资源位置的相关信息,进而可以确定相关信息为PTRS ports ENUMERATED{7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,spare1},和/或PTRS pattern ENUMERATED{pattern 1,pattern 2};或者PTRS port group ENUMERATED{group编号1,group编号2,…}。For example, in the above exemplary RRC signaling, the identifier information of the data resource mapping indication information is the identifier 1, and the bit value of the data resource mapping and the quasi-co-location indication field in the DCI is “00”, and the DCI indication identifier 1 may be determined. The phase tracking information of the phase-track resource of the reference signal can further determine that the relevant information is PTRS ports ENUMERATED {7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,spare1}, and/or PTRS pattern ENUMERATED {pattern 1,pattern 2}; or PTRS port group ENUMERATED{group number 1, group number 2, ...}.
可以理解的,接收端(即终端设备)获取数据资源映射指示信息中的至少两组PTRS的时频资源位置,即可知道数据不映射到所述第二DMRS的时频资源位置。即不会在所述第二DMRS的时频资源位置上进行数据It can be understood that the receiving end (ie, the terminal device) acquires the time-frequency resource location of at least two groups of PTRSs in the data resource mapping indication information, that is, the data is not mapped to the time-frequency resource location of the second DMRS. That is, data is not performed on the time-frequency resource location of the second DMRS.
S202,终端设备根据网络设备1(或网络设备2)发送第一指示信息,确定据资源映射指示信息中的至少两组PTRS的时频资源位置,即可知道数据不映射到所述第二DMRS的时频资源位置。即不会在所述第二DMRS的时频资源位置上进行数据。S202. The terminal device sends the first indication information according to the network device 1 (or the network device 2), and determines the time-frequency resource location of the at least two groups of PTRSs in the resource mapping indication information, so that the data is not mapped to the second DMRS. The location of the time-frequency resource. That is, data is not performed on the time-frequency resource location of the second DMRS.
S203,网络设备1和或网络设备2发送数据信号给终端设备,对待发送的数据信号进行速率匹配,即所述数据信号不映射在所述第一指示信息指示的PTRS的时频资源位置上。或者说,所述数据信号映射到除所述第一指示信息指示的PTRS的时频资源位置以外的其它时频资源的位置上。S203, the network device 1 and the network device 2 send a data signal to the terminal device, and perform rate matching on the data signal to be sent, that is, the data signal is not mapped to the time-frequency resource location of the PTRS indicated by the first indication information. In other words, the data signal is mapped to a location of other time-frequency resources than the time-frequency resource location of the PTRS indicated by the first indication information.
可选的,第一指示信息(高层信令,或者高层信息和物理层信令共同指示)可以包括第一信息和第二信息,其中,第一信息用于确定PTRS占用的子载波,第二信息用于确定PTRS占用的符号。具体的,第一信息可以包括以下至少一项:PTRS的发送使能信息、PTRS的天线端口在DMRS Port group中关联的DMRS port的指示信息、DMRS port group的指示信息、或PTRS的频域密度与调度带宽门限值的关联关系的指示信息。具体的,第二信息可以包括:PTRS的时域密度与MCS门限值的关联关系的指示信息。Optionally, the first indication information (high-level signaling, or high-level information and physical layer signaling common indication) may include first information and second information, where the first information is used to determine a subcarrier occupied by the PTRS, and second The information is used to determine the symbol occupied by the PTRS. Specifically, the first information may include at least one of the following: the sending enable information of the PTRS, the indication information of the DMRS port associated with the antenna port of the PTRS in the DMRS Port group, the indication information of the DMRS port group, or the frequency domain density of the PTRS. Indicates the association relationship with the scheduling bandwidth threshold. Specifically, the second information may include indication information of a relationship between a time domain density of the PTRS and an MCS threshold.
可选的,终端设备可以根据网路设备1(或网路设备2)发送的第一信息确定网路设备1(网络设备2)的PTRS的子载波映射集合,即网络设备1(或网络设备2)可能会占用的子载波集合。可选的,网络设备1(或网络设备2)的PTRS的子载波映射集合可包括:网络设备1调度给终端设备的最大调度带宽对应的频域密度下的(全部可能的)子载波。关 于调度带宽与频域密度的关系可参考后续内容中对PTRS频域密度的说明,这里先不赘述。Optionally, the terminal device may determine, according to the first information sent by the network device 1 (or the network device 2), the subcarrier mapping set of the PTRS of the network device 1 (the network device 2), that is, the network device 1 (or the network device) 2) A collection of subcarriers that may be occupied. Optionally, the set of subcarrier mappings of the PTRS of the network device 1 (or the network device 2) may include: (all possible) subcarriers at a frequency domain density corresponding to a maximum scheduling bandwidth that the network device 1 schedules to the terminal device. For the relationship between the scheduling bandwidth and the frequency domain density, refer to the description of the PTRS frequency domain density in the following content, which will not be described here.
可选的,终端设备可以根据网络设备1(或网络设备2)发送的第二信息确定网络设备1(或网络设备2)的PTRS的符号映射集合,即网络设备1(或网络设备2)可能会占用的符号集合。可选的,网络设备1(或网络设备2)的PTRS的符号映射集合可包括:网络设备1调度给终端设备的的最大MCS对应的时域密度下的(全部可能的)子载波。关于MCS与时域密度的关系可参考后续内容中对PTRS时域密度的说明,这里先不赘述。Optionally, the terminal device may determine, according to the second information sent by the network device 1 (or the network device 2), a symbol mapping set of the PTRS of the network device 1 (or the network device 2), that is, the network device 1 (or the network device 2) may A collection of symbols that will be occupied. Optionally, the symbol mapping set of the PTRS of the network device 1 (or the network device 2) may include: (all possible) subcarriers in the time domain density corresponding to the maximum MCS scheduled by the network device 1 to the terminal device. For the relationship between the MCS and the time domain density, reference may be made to the description of the PTRS time domain density in the following content, which will not be described here.
应理解,不限于图14所示,上述方法中的各个步骤的执行顺序还可以改变,本申请对此不做任何限制。It should be understood that the order of execution of the various steps in the above methods may also be changed, and is not limited in this application.
可选的,当前传输为非相干传输(NCJT)时,网络设备和终端设备进行上述PTRS的速率匹配。例如,可通过网络设备通过RRC信令配置给UE需要盲检测的DCI的数目或者需要盲检的最大的DCI的数目,确定当前是否是NCJT传输,进而确定是否使用上述方法对PTRS的位置进行速率匹配。又比如,可通过显示的信令(物理层DCI信令或者DCI信令),指示当前是否为NCJT传输,确定是否使用上述方法对PTRS的位置进行速率匹配。还可通过DCI信令的指示的QCL关系的个数,隐式的确定当前是否为NCJT传输,进而确定是否使用上述方法对PTRS的位置进行速率匹配。对于确定NCJT的方法,本申请不做任何限定。Optionally, when the current transmission is non-coherent transmission (NCJT), the network device and the terminal device perform rate matching of the foregoing PTRS. For example, the number of DCIs that need to be blindly detected by the UE or the number of DCIs that need to be blindly detected may be configured by the network device through RRC signaling to determine whether the current is an NCJT transmission, and then determine whether to use the foregoing method to rate the location of the PTRS. match. For another example, whether the current NCJT transmission is currently indicated by the displayed signaling (physical layer DCI signaling or DCI signaling) determines whether the location of the PTRS is rate matched using the above method. It is also possible to implicitly determine whether the NCJT transmission is currently performed by the number of indicated QCL relationships of the DCI signaling, and further determine whether to perform rate matching on the location of the PTRS using the above method. The method for determining the NCJT is not limited in this application.
不限于图14所示,如图15所示,网络设备1和网络设备2还可以分别向终端设备发送第二指示信息,可参考S201A和S201B。具体的,网络设备1(或网络设备2)发送的第二指示信息用于指示来自网络设备1(或网络设备2)的PTRS占用的时频资源。可以理解的,网络设备1和网络设备2分别发送的第二指示信息结合起来可用于指示图14实施例中提及的上述至少两组PTRS占用的时频资源的位置。来自网络设备1的PTRS和来自网络设备2的PTRS不具有QCL关系。As shown in FIG. 14, the network device 1 and the network device 2 may also send second indication information to the terminal device respectively, and refer to S201A and S201B. Specifically, the second indication information sent by the network device 1 (or the network device 2) is used to indicate time-frequency resources occupied by the PTRS from the network device 1 (or the network device 2). It can be understood that the second indication information sent by the network device 1 and the network device 2 respectively can be used to indicate the location of the time-frequency resources occupied by the at least two groups of PTRS mentioned in the embodiment of FIG. 14 . The PTRS from the network device 1 and the PTRS from the network device 2 do not have a QCL relationship.
除了S201A和S201B,图15实施例中的其他步骤可参考图14实施例,这里不再赘述。Other steps in the embodiment of FIG. 15 may be referred to the embodiment of FIG. 14 except for S201A and S201B, and details are not described herein again.
下面将介绍PTRS的时域密度以及频域密度的确定方式。The time domain density of PTRS and the method of determining the frequency domain density will be described below.
(一)PT-RS的时域密度(1) Time domain density of PT-RS
本申请中,PT-RS的时域密度可以与循环前缀(Cyclic Prefix,CP)类型、子载波间隔、调制阶数中至少一项相关。In the present application, the time domain density of the PT-RS may be related to at least one of a Cyclic Prefix (CP) type, a subcarrier spacing, and a modulation order.
具体的,所PT-RS的时域密度与CP类型、子载波间隔、调制阶数中至少一项是存在对应关系的。不同的CP类型或子载波间隔或调制阶数对应不同的时域密度。具体的,所述对应关系可以是协议预定义的,也可以是网络设备通过高层信令(如RRC信令)配置的。Specifically, the time domain density of the PT-RS is corresponding to at least one of a CP type, a subcarrier spacing, and a modulation order. Different CP types or subcarrier spacing or modulation orders correspond to different time domain densities. Specifically, the corresponding relationship may be predefined by a protocol, or may be configured by a network device by using high layer signaling, such as RRC signaling.
根据前述内容可知,PT-RS的时域密度可包括如下几种:PT-RS可以连续映射在PUSCH(或PDSCH)的每个符号上,也可以在PUSCH(或PDSCH)的每2个符号上映射一次,还可以在PUSCH(或PDSCH)的每4个符号上映射一次。According to the foregoing, the time domain density of the PT-RS may include the following: the PT-RS may be continuously mapped on each symbol of the PUSCH (or PDSCH), or may be on every two symbols of the PUSCH (or PDSCH). Once mapped, it can also be mapped once every 4 symbols of the PUSCH (or PDSCH).
本申请中,可以根据子载波间隔和调制阶数确定PT-RS的时域密度。具体的,针对1个确定的子载波间隔值,可以通过预定义或高层信令配置一个或多个调制阶数门限值,相邻两个调制阶数门限值之间的全部调制阶数对应相同的PT-RS时域密度,可如表3所示。In the present application, the time domain density of the PT-RS can be determined according to the subcarrier spacing and the modulation order. Specifically, for one determined subcarrier spacing value, one or more modulation order thresholds may be configured by pre-defined or higher layer signaling, and all modulation orders between adjacent two modulation order thresholds Corresponding to the same PT-RS time domain density, as shown in Table 3.
调制阶数Modulation order 时域密度 Time domain density
0<=MCS<MCS_10<=MCS<MCS_1 00
MCS_1<=MCS<MCS_2MCS_1<=MCS<MCS_2 1/41/4
MCS_2<=MCS<MCS_3MCS_2<=MCS<MCS_3 1/21/2
MCS_3<=MCSMCS_3<=MCS 11
表3table 3
其中,MCS_1,MCS_2,MCS_3为调制阶数门限值,时域密度中的“1”、“1/2”、“1/4”分别是指图1所示的3种时域密度。Among them, MCS_1, MCS_2, and MCS_3 are modulation order thresholds, and "1", "1/2", and "1/4" in the time domain density refer to the three time domain densities shown in FIG. 1, respectively.
具体的,在确定的子载波间隔下,可以根据实际调制阶数MCS落入的调制阶数门限区间来确定出PT-RS的时域密度。例如,假设表3表示默认子载波间隔SCS_1=15KHz下的调制阶数门限值,如果实际调制阶数MCS落入区间[MCS_2,MCS_3],则PT-RS的时域密度为1/2。示例仅仅用于解释本发明实施例,不应构成限定。Specifically, under the determined subcarrier spacing, the time domain density of the PT-RS may be determined according to a modulation order threshold interval in which the actual modulation order MCS falls. For example, assume that Table 3 represents the modulation order threshold value at the default subcarrier spacing SCS_1=15 kHz, and if the actual modulation order MCS falls within the interval [MCS_2, MCS_3], the time domain density of the PT-RS is 1/2. The examples are merely illustrative of the embodiments of the invention and should not be construed as limiting.
本申请中,不同的子载波间隔可以对应不同的调制阶数门限值。也即是说,对不同的子载波间隔,可以配置不同的调制阶数门限值和时域密度的对应关系表。In this application, different subcarrier spacings may correspond to different modulation order thresholds. That is to say, for different subcarrier spacings, different correspondence tables of modulation order thresholds and time domain densities can be configured.
具体的,不同的子载波间隔各自对应的调制阶数门限值可以由协议预定义,也可以由网络设备通过高层信令(例如RRC信令)配置。Specifically, the respective modulation order thresholds of different subcarrier intervals may be predefined by a protocol, or may be configured by a network device by using high layer signaling (for example, RRC signaling).
在一些可选的实施例中,可以通过协议预定义或高层信令配置默认的子载波间隔(表示成SC_1),例如15kHz,以及该默认的子载波间隔对应的一个或多个默认门限值(表示成MCS’)。并且,对于其他非默认子载波间隔,可以通过协议预定义或高层信令配置相应的调制阶数偏移值(表示成MCS_offset,为整数),MCS_offset+MCS=MCS’,其中,MCS表示其他非默认子载波间隔下的实际调制阶数。在其他非默认子载波间隔下,可以利用实际的调制阶数MCS加上所述调制阶数偏移值MCS_offset来确定出PT-RS的时域密度。In some optional embodiments, a default subcarrier spacing (denoted as SC_1), such as 15 kHz, and one or more default thresholds corresponding to the default subcarrier spacing may be configured by protocol pre-defined or higher layer signaling. (indicated as MCS'). Moreover, for other non-default subcarrier spacings, the corresponding modulation order offset value (represented as MCS_offset, which is an integer), MCS_offset+MCS=MCS', where MCS indicates other non-configuration, may be configured by protocol pre-defined or higher layer signaling. The actual modulation order at the default subcarrier spacing. At other non-default subcarrier intervals, the actual modulation order MCS plus the modulation order offset value MCS_offset may be used to determine the time domain density of the PT-RS.
举例说明,若表4表示默认子载波间隔SCS_1=15KHz下的调制阶数门限值,在非默认子载波间隔60Hz下,如果实际的调制阶数MCS加上MCS_offset落入区间[0,MCS_1],则PT-RS的时域密度为0。如果实际的调制阶数MCS加上MCS_offset落入区间[MCS_1,MCS_2],则PT-RS的时域密度为1/4。示例仅仅用于解释本发明实施例,不应构成限定。For example, if Table 4 shows the modulation order threshold at the default subcarrier spacing SCS_1=15KHz, at the non-default subcarrier interval of 60Hz, if the actual modulation order MCS plus MCS_offset falls into the interval [0, MCS_1] Then, the time domain density of the PT-RS is zero. If the actual modulation order MCS plus MCS_offset falls within the interval [MCS_1, MCS_2], the time domain density of the PT-RS is 1/4. The examples are merely illustrative of the embodiments of the invention and should not be construed as limiting.
调制阶数Modulation order 时域密度 Time domain density
0<=MCS’<MCS_10<=MCS’<MCS_1 00
MCS_1<=MCS’<MCS_2MCS_1<=MCS’<MCS_2 1/41/4
MCS_2<=MCS’<MCS_3MCS_2<=MCS’<MCS_3 1/21/2
MCS_3<=MCS’MCS_3<=MCS’ 11
表4Table 4
在一些可选的实施例中,可以通过协议预定义或高层信令配置默认的子载波间隔(表示成SCS_1),以及该默认的子载波间隔对应的一个或多个默认调制阶数门限值(表示成MCS’)。并且,对于其他非默认子载波间隔(表示成SCS_n),可以通过协议预定义或高层信令配置相应的缩放因子β(0<β<1),可以定义β=SCS_1/SCS_n。在其他非默认子载波间隔下,可以利用实际的调制阶数MCS和默认调制阶数门限值MCS’确定MCS落在哪一个默认调制阶数门限值区间,然后利用该默认调制阶数门限值区间对应的时域密度乘以缩放因子β来确定出PT-RS的实际时域密度。In some optional embodiments, the default subcarrier spacing (represented as SCS_1) may be configured by protocol pre-defined or higher layer signaling, and one or more default modulation order thresholds corresponding to the default subcarrier spacing. (indicated as MCS'). Moreover, for other non-default subcarrier spacings (denoted as SCS_n), the corresponding scaling factor β (0<β<1) can be configured by protocol pre-defined or higher layer signaling, and β=SCS_1/SCS_n can be defined. In other non-default subcarrier intervals, the actual modulation order MCS and the default modulation order threshold MCS' may be used to determine which default modulation order threshold interval the MCS falls in, and then the default modulation order gate is utilized. The time domain density corresponding to the limit interval is multiplied by the scaling factor β to determine the actual time domain density of the PT-RS.
举例说明,若表4表示默认子载波间隔SCS_1=60KHz下的调制阶数门限值,在非默认子载波间隔120Hz下,如果实际的调制阶数MCS落入[MCS_2,MCS_3]中,则PT-RS的实际时域密度是时域密度“1/2”与缩放因子β的乘积最接近的时域密度。由于β=60/120=1/2, 因此,所述PT-RS的实际时域密度是1/4。示例仅仅用于解释本发明实施例,不应构成限定。For example, if Table 4 shows the modulation order threshold at the default subcarrier spacing SCS_1=60KHz, if the actual modulation order MCS falls within [MCS_2, MCS_3] at the non-default subcarrier spacing of 120 Hz, then PT The actual time domain density of the -RS is the time domain density closest to the product of the time domain density "1/2" and the scaling factor β. Since β = 60 / 120 = 1/2, the actual time domain density of the PT-RS is 1/4. The examples are merely illustrative of the embodiments of the invention and should not be construed as limiting.
本申请中,针对不同的CP类型或长度,可以通过协议预定义或者高层信令(例如RRC信令)配置子载波间隔和调制阶数中至少一项与PT-RS的时域密度之间的对应关系。In this application, for different CP types or lengths, between at least one of the subcarrier spacing and the modulation order and the time domain density of the PT-RS may be configured by protocol pre-defined or higher layer signaling (eg, RRC signaling). Correspondence relationship.
可选的,针对扩展循环前缀(ExtendedCyclic Prefix,ECP),可以通过协议预定义或者高层信令配置PT-RS的时域密度为:PT-RS连续映射在PUSCH(或PDSCH)的每个符号上。这样,可实现在高速大时延扩展场景中,利用PT-RS辅助多普勒频偏估计。Optionally, for an Extended Cycling Prefix (ECP), the time domain density of the PT-RS may be configured by protocol pre-defined or higher layer signaling: the PT-RS is continuously mapped on each symbol of the PUSCH (or PDSCH). . In this way, PT-RS can be used to assist Doppler frequency offset estimation in a high speed and large delay spread scenario.
需要说明的,表3和表4仅仅用于解释本发明实施例,不应构成限定。It should be noted that Tables 3 and 4 are only used to explain the embodiments of the present invention, and should not be construed as limiting.
(二)PT-RS的频域密度(2) Frequency domain density of PT-RS
本申请中,PT-RS的频域密度可以与CP类型、所述用户调度带宽、子载波间隔、调制阶数中至少一项相关。也即是说,PT-RS在所述用户调度带宽内映射的子载波总数L PT-RS可以与CP类型、所述用户调度带宽、子载波间隔、调制阶数中至少一项相关。 In this application, the frequency domain density of the PT-RS may be related to at least one of a CP type, the user scheduling bandwidth, a subcarrier spacing, and a modulation order. That is to say, the total number of subcarriers L PT-RS mapped by the PT-RS in the user scheduling bandwidth may be related to at least one of a CP type, the user scheduling bandwidth, a subcarrier spacing, and a modulation order.
具体的,所PT-RS的频域密度与CP类型、所述用户调度带宽、子载波间隔、调制阶数中至少一项是存在对应关系的。不同的CP类型或所述用户调度带宽或子载波间隔或调制阶数对应不同的频域密度。具体的,所述对应关系可以是协议预定义的,也可以是网络设备通过高层信令(如RRC信令)配置的。Specifically, the frequency domain density of the PT-RS has a corresponding relationship with at least one of a CP type, the user scheduling bandwidth, a subcarrier spacing, and a modulation order. Different CP types or the user scheduling bandwidth or subcarrier spacing or modulation order correspond to different frequency domain densities. Specifically, the corresponding relationship may be predefined by a protocol, or may be configured by a network device by using high layer signaling, such as RRC signaling.
具体的,针对1个确定的子载波间隔,可以通过预定义或高层信令配置一个或多个调度带宽门限值,相邻两个调度带宽门限值之间的全部调度带宽对应相同的PT-RS频域密度,可如表5所示。Specifically, for one determined subcarrier interval, one or more scheduling bandwidth thresholds may be configured by using predefined or higher layer signaling, and all scheduling bandwidths between adjacent two scheduling bandwidth thresholds correspond to the same PT. -RS frequency domain density, as shown in Table 5.
调度带宽门限Scheduling bandwidth threshold 频域密度(每个资源块中的子载波个数)Frequency domain density (number of subcarriers in each resource block)
0<=BW<BW_10<=BW<BW_1 00
BW_1<=BW<BW_2BW_1<=BW<BW_2 11
BW_2<=BW<BW_3BW_2<=BW<BW_3 1/21/2
BW_3<=BW<BW_4BW_3<=BW<BW_4 1/41/4
BW_4<=BW<BW_5BW_4<=BW<BW_5 1/81/8
BW_5<=BWBW_5<=BW 1/161/16
表5table 5
其中,BW_1,BW_2,BW_3,BW_4和BW_5为调度带宽门限值,调度带宽门限可用调度带宽包含的资源块个数,也可以调度带宽对应的频域跨度表示,这里不作限制。频域密度“1/2”表示PT-RS每2个资源块占一个子载波。频域密度“1/4”、“1/8”、“1/16”的意义可类推,不再赘述。The BW_1, BW_2, BW_3, BW_4, and BW_5 are the scheduling bandwidth thresholds, and the number of resource blocks included in the scheduling bandwidth of the scheduling bandwidth threshold may be represented by the frequency domain span corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth, which is not limited herein. The frequency domain density "1/2" indicates that the PT-RS occupies one subcarrier per 2 resource blocks. The meanings of the frequency domain density "1/4", "1/8", and "1/16" can be analogized and will not be described again.
具体的,在确定的子载波间隔下,可以根据实际调度带宽BW落入的调度带宽门限区间来确定出PT-RS的频域密度。例如,假设表1表示默认子载波间隔SCS_1=15KHz下的调度带宽门限值,如果实际调度带宽BW落入区间[BW_2,BW_3],则PT-RS的频域密度为1/2。示例仅仅用于解释本发明实施例,不应构成限定。Specifically, under the determined subcarrier interval, the frequency domain density of the PT-RS may be determined according to a scheduling bandwidth threshold interval in which the actual scheduling bandwidth BW falls. For example, suppose that Table 1 represents the scheduling bandwidth threshold at the default subcarrier spacing SCS_1=15 kHz. If the actual scheduling bandwidth BW falls within the interval [BW_2, BW_3], the frequency domain density of the PT-RS is 1/2. The examples are merely illustrative of the embodiments of the invention and should not be construed as limiting.
本申请中,不同的子载波间隔可以对应不同的调度带宽门限值。也即是说,对不同的子载波间隔,可以配置不同的调度带宽门限值和时域密度的对应关系表。In this application, different subcarrier spacings may correspond to different scheduling bandwidth thresholds. That is to say, for different subcarrier spacings, different correspondence table between scheduling bandwidth threshold and time domain density can be configured.
具体的,不同的子载波间隔各自对应的调度带宽门限值可以由协议预定义,也可以由网络设备通过高层信令(例如RRC信令)配置。Specifically, the scheduling bandwidth threshold corresponding to each of the different subcarrier intervals may be predefined by a protocol, or may be configured by the network device by using high layer signaling (for example, RRC signaling).
在一些可选的实施例中,可以通过协议预定义或高层信令配置默认的子载波间隔(表 示成SCS_1),例如15kHz,以及该默认的子载波间隔对应的一个或多个默认调度带宽门限值(表示成BW’)。并且,对于其他非默认子载波间隔,可以通过协议预定义或高层信令配置相应的调度带宽偏移值(表示成BW_offset,为整数),BW_offset+BW=BW’,其中,BW表示其他非默认子载波间隔下的实际调度带宽。在其他非默认子载波间隔下,可以利用实际的调度带宽BW加上所述调度带宽偏移值BW_offset来确定出PT-RS的频域密度。In some optional embodiments, a default subcarrier spacing (represented as SCS_1), such as 15 kHz, may be configured by protocol pre-defined or higher layer signaling, and one or more default scheduling bandwidth gates corresponding to the default subcarrier spacing. Limit (expressed as BW'). Moreover, for other non-default subcarrier spacings, the corresponding scheduling bandwidth offset value (represented as BW_offset, which is an integer), BW_offset+BW=BW', may be configured by protocol pre-defined or higher layer signaling, where BW indicates other non-default The actual scheduling bandwidth under the subcarrier spacing. At other non-default subcarrier intervals, the actual scheduling bandwidth BW plus the scheduling bandwidth offset value BW_offset may be used to determine the frequency domain density of the PT-RS.
举例说明,若表6表示默认子载波间隔SCS_1=15KHz下的调度带宽门限值,在非默认子载波间隔60Hz下,如果实际的调度带宽BW加上BW_offset落入区间[BW_1,BW_2],则PT-RS的频域密度为1。如果实际的调制阶数BW加上BW_offset落入区间[BW_2,BW_3],则PT-RS的频域密度为1/2。示例仅仅用于解释本发明实施例,不应构成限定。For example, if the default subcarrier spacing SCS_1=15KHz scheduling bandwidth threshold is shown in Table 6, if the actual scheduling bandwidth BW plus BW_offset falls into the interval [BW_1, BW_2], the non-default subcarrier spacing is 60 Hz. The frequency domain density of the PT-RS is 1. If the actual modulation order BW plus BW_offset falls within the interval [BW_2, BW_3], the frequency domain density of the PT-RS is 1/2. The examples are merely illustrative of the embodiments of the invention and should not be construed as limiting.
调度带宽门限Scheduling bandwidth threshold 频域密度(每个资源块中的子载波个数)Frequency domain density (number of subcarriers in each resource block)
0<=BW’<BW_10<=BW’<BW_1 00
BW_1<=BW’<BW_2BW_1<=BW’<BW_2 11
BW_2<=BW’<BW_3BW_2<=BW’<BW_3 1/21/2
BW_3<=BW‘<BW_4BW_3<=BW‘<BW_4 1/41/4
BW_4<=BW’<BW_5BW_4<=BW’<BW_5 1/81/8
BW_5<=BW’BW_5<=BW’ 1/161/16
表6Table 6
在一些可选的实施例中,可以通过协议预定义或高层信令配置默认的子载波间隔(表示成SCS_1),以及该默认的子载波间隔对应的一个或多个默认调度带宽门限值(表示成BW’)。并且,对于其他非默认子载波间隔(表示成SCS_n),可以通过协议预定义或高层信令配置相应的缩放因子β(0<β<1),可以定义β=SCS_n/SCS_1。在其他非默认子载波间隔下,可以利用实际的调度带宽BW和默认调度带宽门限值BW’确定BW落在哪一个默认调度带宽门限值区间,然后利用该默认调度带宽门限值区间对应的频域密度乘以缩放因子β来确定出PT-RS的实际频域密度。In some optional embodiments, a default subcarrier spacing (represented as SCS_1) may be configured by protocol pre-defined or higher layer signaling, and one or more default scheduling bandwidth thresholds corresponding to the default sub-carrier spacing ( Expressed as BW'). Moreover, for other non-default subcarrier spacings (represented as SCS_n), the corresponding scaling factor β (0<β<1) can be configured by protocol pre-defined or higher layer signaling, and β=SCS_n/SCS_1 can be defined. In other non-default subcarrier intervals, the actual scheduling bandwidth BW and the default scheduling bandwidth threshold BW' may be used to determine which default scheduling bandwidth threshold interval the BW falls in, and then the default scheduling bandwidth threshold interval is used. The frequency domain density is multiplied by the scaling factor β to determine the actual frequency domain density of the PT-RS.
举例说明,若表6表示默认子载波间隔SCS_1=60KHz下的调制阶数门限值,在非默认子载波间隔120Hz下,如果实际的调度带宽BW落入[BW_3,BW_4]中,则PT-RS的实际频域密度是频域密度“1/4”与缩放因子β的乘积最接近的频域密度。由于β=120/60=2,因此,所述PT-RS的实际时域密度是1/2。示例仅仅用于解释本发明实施例,不应构成限定。For example, if Table 6 shows the modulation order threshold at the default subcarrier spacing SCS_1=60KHz, if the actual scheduling bandwidth BW falls into [BW_3, BW_4] at the non-default subcarrier spacing of 120 Hz, then PT- The actual frequency domain density of the RS is the frequency domain density closest to the product of the frequency domain density "1/4" and the scaling factor β. Since β = 120/60 = 2, the actual time domain density of the PT-RS is 1/2. The examples are merely illustrative of the embodiments of the invention and should not be construed as limiting.
需要说明的,表5和表6仅仅用于解释本发明实施例,不应构成限定。It should be noted that Tables 5 and 6 are only used to explain the embodiments of the present invention and should not be construed as limiting.
另外,本申请还提供了另一种信号传输方法。In addition, the present application also provides another signal transmission method.
首先,介绍非相干联合传输场景。First, introduce the non-coherent joint transmission scenario.
目前,网络设备和终端设备可以基于多天线技术来通信。在上行通信的过程中,网络设备可以配置终端设备发送探测参考信号。探测参考信号(sounding reference signal,SRS)是用于测量上行信道的一种参考信号。网络设备基于终端设备发送的SRS进行上行信道测量,以获取上行信道的信道状态信息(channel state information,CSI),以便于进行上行资源的调度。当上下行信道具有互易性的时候,网络设备还可以通过测量SRS获取下行CSI,即首先获取上行CSI,再根据信道互易性确定下行CSI。Currently, network devices and terminal devices can communicate based on multi-antenna technology. In the process of uplink communication, the network device may configure the terminal device to send a sounding reference signal. A sounding reference signal (SRS) is a reference signal used to measure an upstream channel. The network device performs uplink channel measurement based on the SRS sent by the terminal device to obtain channel state information (CSI) of the uplink channel, so as to facilitate scheduling of uplink resources. When the uplink and downlink channels have reciprocity, the network device can also obtain the downlink CSI by measuring the SRS, that is, first obtain the uplink CSI, and then determine the downlink CSI according to the channel reciprocity.
在LTE中,支持了一发两收(1T2R)终端设备的SRS信号在不同的天线间切换。在 这种情况下,终端设备的上行发送只能同时用一个天线或一个端口进行发送,而下行接收可以用2个天线进行接收,因此此时网络设备基于单天线的SRS无法获得下行2接收天线的信道。为了能够获得所有下行天线的信道,终端设备必须在多个天线上不同时间发送SRS,即采用SRS天线切换的方式进行SRS发送。In LTE, an SRS signal supporting a two-transmission (1T2R) terminal device is switched between different antennas. In this case, the uplink transmission of the terminal device can only be transmitted by one antenna or one port at the same time, and the downlink reception can be received by two antennas. Therefore, the network device cannot obtain the downlink 2 receiving antenna based on the single antenna SRS. Channel. In order to obtain the channels of all downlink antennas, the terminal equipment must transmit SRSs at different times on multiple antennas, that is, SRS transmission is performed by means of SRS antenna switching.
下面详细说明解决上述技术问题的再一种信号传输方法。下面展开:A further signal transmission method for solving the above technical problems will be described in detail below. Expand below:
步骤一:网络设备向终端设备发送SRS配置信息。其中天线端口信息中所指示的天线端口数需要不大于终端设备同时能进行上行传输的天线数Step 1: The network device sends the SRS configuration information to the terminal device. The number of antenna ports indicated in the antenna port information needs to be no greater than the number of antennas that the terminal device can simultaneously perform uplink transmission.
可选的,网络设备配置SRS的周期,SRS的周期可以为绝对时间如1ms,0.5ms,10ms等,并且网络设备通过信令指示该周期对应的标识。还可以配置相对时间,例如时隙数,如1时隙,2时隙,此外,还可以配置周期为小于1的值,例如0.5时隙,从而使能一个时隙内多次发送该SRS。Optionally, the network device configures the SRS period, and the SRS period may be an absolute time, such as 1 ms, 0.5 ms, 10 ms, etc., and the network device indicates the identifier corresponding to the period by signaling. It is also possible to configure relative time, such as the number of time slots, such as 1 time slot, 2 time slots, and further, a period of less than 1, for example 0.5 time slots, can be configured to enable multiple transmissions of the SRS in one time slot.
可选的,需要终端设备在消息三(Msg3)或高层信令如RRC信令上报同时能发送的最大天线数。本实施例中端口数为u=2.Optionally, the terminal device needs to report the maximum number of antennas that can be sent at the same time in message three (Msg3) or higher layer signaling, such as RRC signaling. In this embodiment, the number of ports is u=2.
可选的,网络设备向终端设备发送信令,该信令用于通知终端设备以SRS天线切换的方式发送SRS,或通知终端设备支持天线选择功能。Optionally, the network device sends signaling to the terminal device, where the signaling is used to notify the terminal device to send the SRS in the manner of SRS antenna switching, or notify the terminal device to support the antenna selection function.
可选的,网络设备通知终端设备所使用天线的总数量,例如本实施例中天线的总数量为v=4,若u=2则表示终端设备一次用2个天线发送,总共在4个天线上发送SRS。Optionally, the network device notifies the total number of antennas used by the terminal device, for example, the total number of antennas in this embodiment is v=4, and if u=2, it indicates that the terminal device transmits with two antennas at a time, for a total of four antennas. Send SRS on.
步骤二:终端设备根据网络设备的配置信息在v个天线上时分的发送SRS,同一时间用u个端口或u个天线发送SRS。本步骤以u=2,v=4为例,具体的有以下方案:Step 2: The terminal device transmits the SRS on the v antennas according to the configuration information of the network device, and sends the SRS by using u ports or u antennas at the same time. This step takes u=2, v=4 as an example. The specific solution is as follows:
方案1:天线的标识可以记作a(n SRS),其中n SRS表示根据所述上行参考信号发送的次数确定,或根据当前SRS所在的帧号、子帧号、时隙号、符号号、SRS的资源的符号数、SRS的周期中至少之一确定,或n SRS表示在一段时间内本次发送SRS的计数。例如n SRS为所述上行参考信号发送的次数或次数减1,或者n SRS为一个帧或一个帧号的循环周期内SRS时域位置的计数。例如在LTE中n SRS的定义为: The identifier of the antenna can be recorded as a(n SRS ), where n SRS is determined according to the number of times the uplink reference signal is sent, or according to the frame number, subframe number, slot number, symbol number where the current SRS is located, At least one of the number of symbols of the resources of the SRS and the period of the SRS is determined, or n SRS represents a count of the SRSs transmitted this time for a period of time. For example, n SRS is the number of times or times the uplink reference signal is transmitted minus 1, or n SRS is a count of the SRS time domain position in a cycle of one frame or one frame number. For example, in LTE, n SRS is defined as:
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000013
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000013
其中N SP为一个帧内的下行到上行切换的次数,n f为帧号,n s为帧内的时隙号,T SRS为SRS的周期,T offset根据特殊子帧中的符号位置和SRS的符号数量确定,T offset_max为T offest的最大值。可以看出,该计算公式中的n SRS为本次发送的SRS在一个帧号的0~1023的周期内的满足SRS周期的所有位置中的计数。 Where N SP is the number of downlink-to-uplink handovers in a frame, n f is the frame number, n s is the slot number in the frame, T SRS is the period of the SRS, and T offset is based on the symbol position and SRS in the special subframe. The number of symbols is determined, and T offset_max is the maximum value of T offest . It can be seen that the n SRS in the calculation formula is the count of all the positions of the SRS that satisfy the SRS period in the period of 0 to 1023 of one frame number.
当不进行跳频的时候,When no frequency hopping is performed,
a(n SRS)=2·[n SRSmod 2]+γ(1) a(n SRS )=2·[n SRS mod 2]+γ(1)
当进行跳频时有:When performing frequency hopping, there are:
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000014
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000014
其中
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000015
其中K为跳频的总跳数。这里以K=2的跳频场景为例,下表给出了天线端口和传输次数以及传输的带宽的关系:
among them
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000015
Where K is the total number of hops for frequency hopping. Here, taking the frequency hopping scene of K=2 as an example, the following table gives the relationship between the antenna port and the number of transmissions and the bandwidth of the transmission:
n SRS n SRS 跳频的第一个带宽First bandwidth of frequency hopping 跳频的第二个带宽Second bandwidth of frequency hopping
00 天线{0,1}Antenna {0,1}  
11   天线{2,3}Antenna {2,3}
22 天线{2,3}Antenna {2,3}  
33   天线{0,1}Antenna {0,1}
表7Table 7
可以看出,由于γ有两个取值,所以根据(1)的计算可以个根据1个n SRS得到两个同时传输的天线。因此,第一次传输时,终端设备在第一个跳频的位置用天线0和1发送SRS,第二次传输,终端设备在第二个跳频位置用天线2和3发送SRS,第三次传输时,终端设备在第一个跳频的位置用天线2和3发送SRS,第四次传输,终端设备在第二个跳频位置用天线0和1发送SRS。 It can be seen that since γ has two values, according to the calculation of (1), two simultaneously transmitted antennas can be obtained according to one n SRS . Therefore, during the first transmission, the terminal equipment transmits the SRS with the antennas 0 and 1 at the first frequency hopping position, and the second transmission, the terminal equipment transmits the SRS with the antennas 2 and 3 at the second frequency hopping position, and the third In the case of secondary transmission, the terminal equipment transmits the SRS with the antennas 2 and 3 at the first frequency hopping position, and the fourth transmission, the terminal equipment transmits the SRS with the antennas 0 and 1 at the second frequency hopping position.
可选的,该方案可以应用于u个发送天线2u个接收天线的情况,此时(1)和(2)可变为,不跳频时:Optionally, the solution can be applied to the case where the u transmit antennas have 2u receive antennas, and (1) and (2) can be changed to be no frequency hopping:
a(n SRS)=u·[n SRS mod 2]+γ(3) a(n SRS )=u·[n SRS mod 2]+γ(3)
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000016
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000016
其中
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000017
among them
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000017
可选的,该方案也不限于上述公式中a(n SRS)与n SRS的对应关系,例如可以有如下a(n SRS)与n SRS的对应关系的表达式: Optionally, the solution is not limited to the correspondence between a(n SRS ) and n SRS in the foregoing formula, for example, an expression of a correspondence between a(n SRS ) and n SRS may be:
a(n SRS)=u·f(n SRS)+γ(5) a(n SRS )=u·f(n SRS )+γ(5)
其中γ=0,1,…u-1,f(n SRS)为n SRS的一个函数。 Where γ=0,1,...u-1,f(n SRS ) is a function of n SRS .
可选的,该方案中的γ和β可以有其他取值方式,例如γ=0,2,或者γ=0,2,…2u-2这里不做限定,或可以是网络设备通过信令配置的值,信令可以是RRC信令或MAC CE信令或DCI。Optionally, γ and β in the scheme may have other value manners, for example, γ=0, 2, or γ=0, 2, ... 2u-2 is not limited herein, or may be configured by a network device through signaling. The value of the signaling may be RRC signaling or MAC CE signaling or DCI.
方案2:天线的标识可以记作a(n SRS),其中n SRS可以参考方案1中的定义。 Scheme 2: The identifier of the antenna can be written as a(n SRS ), where n SRS can be defined in the scheme 1.
当不进行跳频的时候,When no frequency hopping is performed,
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000018
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000018
当进行跳频时有:When performing frequency hopping, there are:
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000019
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000019
其中
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000020
并得到a(n SRS)的值如下
among them
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000020
And get the value of a(n SRS ) as follows
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000021
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000021
其中K为跳频的总跳数。这里以K=2的跳频场景为例,下表给出了天线端口和传输次数以及传输的带宽的关系:Where K is the total number of hops for frequency hopping. Here, taking the frequency hopping scene of K=2 as an example, the following table gives the relationship between the antenna port and the number of transmissions and the bandwidth of the transmission:
n SRS n SRS 跳频的第一个带宽First bandwidth of frequency hopping 跳频的第二个带宽Second bandwidth of frequency hopping
00 天线{0,1}Antenna {0,1}  
11   天线{2,3}Antenna {2,3}
22 天线{2,3}Antenna {2,3}  
33   天线{0,1}Antenna {0,1}
表8Table 8
可以看出,由于γ有两个取值,所以根据(1)的计算可以个根据1个n SRS得到两个同时传输的天线。因此,第一次传输时,终端设备在第一个跳频的位置用天线0和1发送SRS,第二次传输,终端设备在第二个跳频位置用天线2和3发送SRS,第三次传输时,终端设备在第一个跳频的位置用天线2和3发送SRS,第四次传输,终端设备在第二个跳频位置用天线0和1发送SRS。 It can be seen that since γ has two values, according to the calculation of (1), two simultaneously transmitted antennas can be obtained according to one n SRS . Therefore, during the first transmission, the terminal equipment transmits the SRS with the antennas 0 and 1 at the first frequency hopping position, and the second transmission, the terminal equipment transmits the SRS with the antennas 2 and 3 at the second frequency hopping position, and the third In the case of secondary transmission, the terminal equipment transmits the SRS with the antennas 2 and 3 at the first frequency hopping position, and the fourth transmission, the terminal equipment transmits the SRS with the antennas 0 and 1 at the second frequency hopping position.
可选的,该方案中式(8)的
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000022
和a(n SRS)的对应关系可以用表格或其他公式表达得出,这里不做限制。
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000023
和a(n SRS)的对应关系还可以是网络设备通过信令配置的值,信令可以是RRC信令或MAC CE信令或DCI。
Optional, the program of formula (8)
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000022
The correspondence with a(n SRS ) can be expressed in a table or other formula, and no limitation is made here.
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000023
The corresponding relationship with a(n SRS ) may also be a value configured by the network device through signaling, and the signaling may be RRC signaling or MAC CE signaling or DCI.
可选的,该方案可以应用于u个发送天线2u个接收天线的情况,此时(8)可变为:Optionally, the solution can be applied to the case where the u transmit antennas have 2u receive antennas, and (8) can be changed to:
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000024
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000024
同样的,可选的,该方案中式(9)的
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000025
和a(n SRS)的对应关系可以用表格或其他公式表达得出,这里不做限制。
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000026
和a(n SRS)的对应关系还可以是网络设备通过信令配置的值,信令可以是RRC信令或MAC CE信令或DCI。
Similarly, optional, the formula (9)
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000025
The correspondence with a(n SRS ) can be expressed in a table or other formula, and no limitation is made here.
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000026
The corresponding relationship with a(n SRS ) may also be a value configured by the network device through signaling, and the signaling may be RRC signaling or MAC CE signaling or DCI.
可选的,该方案也不限于上述公式(6),(7)中a(n SRS)与n SRS的对应关系。 Optionally, the solution is not limited to the corresponding relationship between a(n SRS ) and n SRS in the above formula (6), (7).
可选的,本方案中的
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000027
可以理解为天线组的标识。
Optional, in this scenario
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000027
It can be understood as the identification of the antenna group.
可选的,针对上述方案1或方案2,以及其他可行的方案,网络设备通过SRS配置信息为终端设备配置多个SRS资源,例如所述多个SRS资源组成一个SRS资源组,则所述网络设备通知终端设备以SRS天线切换的方式发送SRS,或通知终端设备支持天线选择功能可以理解为配置所述SRS资源组中以天线切换的方式发送SRS。Optionally, for the foregoing solution 1 or solution 2, and other feasible solutions, the network device configures, by using SRS configuration information, multiple SRS resources for the terminal device, for example, the multiple SRS resources form one SRS resource group, where the network The device notifies the terminal device to send the SRS in the manner of SRS antenna switching, or informs the terminal device to support the antenna selection function. It can be understood as configuring the SRS resource group to transmit the SRS in an antenna switching manner.
可选的,此时SRS资源组中至少2个SRS资源间采用至少1个不同的天线发送SRS,例如可以SRS资源组中的所有SRS资源均采用不同的天线发送SRS。可选的,SRS资源和SRS资源上发送SRS的天线具有对应关系,例如对于2发送天线4接收天线的用户,一个SRS资源组可以包含2个SRS资源,第一个SRS资源对应2个天线,如天线0,1,第二个SRS资源对应另外2个天线,例如天线2,3.则SRS资源所映射的时频位置可以根据SRS天线切换发送方案中确定发送天线来确定,例如上述方案1,2,例如当确定发送天线为0,1时,所发送的SRS属于第一个SRS资源,如SRS资源0,当确定发送天线为2,3时,所发送的SRS属于另一个SRS资源,如SRS资源1.需要说明的是,由于SRS天线切换发送方案可以用于确定SRS所使用的天线,所以也可以用同样的计算公式确定SRS资源或SRS资源的编号,如根据式(1)(2)确定SRS资源的方法为:Optionally, at least one SRS resource in the SRS resource group is used to send the SRS by using at least one different antenna. For example, all the SRS resources in the SRS resource group may use different antennas to send the SRS. Optionally, the SRS resource has a corresponding relationship with the antenna for transmitting the SRS on the SRS resource. For example, for the user of the receiving antenna of the transmitting antenna 4, one SRS resource group may include two SRS resources, and the first SRS resource corresponds to two antennas. For example, antenna 0, 1, the second SRS resource corresponds to the other two antennas, for example, antenna 2, 3. The time-frequency position mapped by the SRS resource can be determined according to the determination of the transmitting antenna in the SRS antenna switching transmission scheme, for example, the above scheme 1 2, for example, when it is determined that the transmitting antenna is 0, 1, the transmitted SRS belongs to the first SRS resource, such as SRS resource 0, and when it is determined that the transmitting antenna is 2, 3, the transmitted SRS belongs to another SRS resource, For example, SRS resources 1. It should be noted that since the SRS antenna switching transmission scheme can be used to determine the antenna used by the SRS, the same calculation formula can be used to determine the number of the SRS resource or the SRS resource, such as according to equation (1) ( 2) The method for determining SRS resources is:
当不进行跳频的时候,When no frequency hopping is performed,
                           b(n SRS)=n SRS mod 2(1) b(n SRS )=n SRS mod 2(1)
当进行跳频时有:When performing frequency hopping, there are:
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000028
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000028
其中
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000029
among them
Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-000029
b(n SRS)为SRS资源的标识或相对标识,或在SRS资源组内的标识。需要注意的是,这里的n SRS为所述SRS资源组中的SRS资源上发送SRS的总次数确定,或根据当前SRS资源组中的SRS资源所在的帧号、子帧号、时隙号、符号号、SRS的资源的符号数、SRS的周期中至少之一确定,或n SRS表示在一段时间内所述SRS资源组内的所有SRS资源中本次发送SRS的计数。具体可以参考方案1中的描述,其中SRS为所述SRS资源组内的所有SRS资源上的SRS信号。 b(n SRS ) is an identifier or relative identifier of the SRS resource, or an identifier in the SRS resource group. It should be noted that the n SRS is determined by the total number of times the SRS is sent on the SRS resource in the SRS resource group, or according to the frame number, the subframe number, the slot number, and the slot number of the SRS resource in the current SRS resource group. The symbol number, the number of symbols of the resources of the SRS, and the period of the SRS are determined, or the n SRS represents a count of the SRSs currently transmitted in all the SRS resources in the SRS resource group for a period of time. For details, refer to the description in scheme 1, where the SRS is an SRS signal on all SRS resources in the SRS resource group.
在上述例子中,n SRS不是所述SRS资源组中某一个SRS资源中的SRS计数,而是SRS资源组中所有SRS资源上的SRS的计数。可选的,所述n SRS也可以是所述SRS资源组中某一个SRS资源中的SRS计数,即n SRS为所述SRS资源组中的一个SRS资源上发送SRS的次数确定,或根据当前SRS资源组中的一个SRS资源所在的帧号、子帧号、时隙号、符号号、SRS的资源的符号数、SRS的周期中至少之一确定,或n SRS表示在一段时间内所述SRS资源组内的一个SRS资源中本次发送SRS的计数。具体可以参考方案1中的描述,其中SRS为所述SRS资源组内的一个SRS资源上的SRS信号。此时可以通过配置SRS资源组中的多个SRS资源的时域和频域资源,不同的SRS资源用于测量相同的频域资源,且不同的SRS资源对应不同的天线或天线组,实现SRS在不同的SRS资源间切换发送天线。例如配置SRS资源0对应天线0,1,SRS资源1对应天线2,3。SRS资源组包括SRS资源0和SRS资源1,网络设备通过配置SRS资源0和资源1的时频位置,并指示终端设备在所述SRS资源组中的SRS资源,或SRS资源0和SRS资源1上发送SRS。从而实现在不同的SRS资源间切换实现在所有的天线间发送SRS。 In the above example, the n SRS is not an SRS count in one of the SRS resources in the SRS resource group, but a count of SRSs on all SRS resources in the SRS resource group. Optionally, the n SRS may also be an SRS count in one of the SRS resources in the SRS resource group, that is, the n SRS is determined by the number of times the SRS is sent on one SRS resource in the SRS resource group, or according to the current At least one of a frame number, a subframe number, a slot number, a symbol number, a symbol number of a resource of the SRS, and a period of the SRS of one SRS resource in the SRS resource group is determined, or n SRS indicates that the period is within a period of time The count of SRSs sent this time in one SRS resource in the SRS resource group. For details, refer to the description in scheme 1, where the SRS is an SRS signal on one SRS resource in the SRS resource group. At this time, the time domain and the frequency domain resource of the multiple SRS resources in the SRS resource group can be configured. Different SRS resources are used to measure the same frequency domain resource, and different SRS resources correspond to different antennas or antenna groups to implement SRS. Switch the transmit antenna between different SRS resources. For example, the SRS resource 0 is configured to correspond to the antenna 0, 1, and the SRS resource 1 corresponds to the antenna 2, 3. The SRS resource group includes SRS resource 0 and SRS resource 1, and the network device configures the SRS resource 0 and the time-frequency location of the resource 1, and indicates the SRS resource of the terminal device in the SRS resource group, or the SRS resource 0 and the SRS resource 1 Send SRS on. Thus, switching between different SRS resources is implemented to implement SRS transmission between all antennas.
相比LTE中的方案,本方案可以进一步支持u个Tx(发送)天线v个Rx(接收)天线的终端设备的天线切换,其中u>1或v>2,且u<v。Compared with the scheme in LTE, the scheme can further support antenna switching of terminal devices of u Tx (transmitting) antennas v Rx (receiving) antennas, where u>1 or v>2, and u<v.
参见图16,图16示出了本申请提供一种无线通信系统、终端及网络设备。无线通信系统10包括:第一设备400和第二设备500。其中,在上行传输过程中,第一设备400可以为图4实施例中的终端200,第二设备500可以为图5实施例中的网络设备300。在下行传输过程中,第一设备400可以为图5实施例中的网络设备300,第二设备500可以为图4实施例中的终端200。无线通信系统10可以是图3描述的无线通信系统100。下面分别描述。Referring to FIG. 16, FIG. 16 illustrates a wireless communication system, a terminal, and a network device. The wireless communication system 10 includes a first device 400 and a second device 500. The first device 400 may be the terminal 200 in the embodiment of FIG. 4, and the second device 500 may be the network device 300 in the embodiment of FIG. 5 in the uplink transmission process. In the downlink transmission process, the first device 400 may be the network device 300 in the embodiment of FIG. 5, and the second device 500 may be the terminal 200 in the embodiment of FIG. The wireless communication system 10 can be the wireless communication system 100 depicted in FIG. Described separately below.
如图16所示,第一设备400可包括:处理单元401和发送单元403。其中:As shown in FIG. 16, the first device 400 may include a processing unit 401 and a transmitting unit 403. among them:
处理单元401,可以用于将第一参考信号映射在第一符号上;所述第一参考信号用于相位跟踪。其中,所述第一符号包括时域单元内第二符号之前的承载数据信号的符号,所述第二符号是指所述时域单元内承载解调参考信号的第1个符号,或所述第二符号是指所述时域单元内连续的多个符号,所述连续的多个符号包括承载解调参考信号的第一个符号;The processing unit 401 can be configured to map the first reference signal on the first symbol; the first reference signal is used for phase tracking. The first symbol includes a symbol of a bearer data signal before the second symbol in the time domain unit, and the second symbol refers to a first symbol that carries the demodulation reference signal in the time domain unit, or The second symbol refers to a plurality of consecutive symbols in the time domain unit, the consecutive plurality of symbols including a first symbol carrying a demodulation reference signal;
发送单元403,可以用于向第二设备500发送所述第一参考信号。The sending unit 403 can be configured to send the first reference signal to the second device 500.
处理单元401可以根据前述实施例一至实施例三描述PTRS时域映射规则来映射PTRS,具体可参考前述实施例一至实施例三,这里不再赘述。The processing unit 401 may be configured to map the PTRS according to the PTRS time domain mapping rule according to the foregoing Embodiments 1 to 3, and may refer to the foregoing Embodiment 1 to Embodiment 3, and details are not described herein again.
可以理解的,关于第一设备400包括的各个功能单元的具体实现可参考前述各个实施例,这里不再赘述。For a specific implementation of the various functional units included in the first device 400, reference may be made to the foregoing various embodiments, and details are not described herein again.
如图16所示,第二设备500可包括:接收单元501和处理单元503。其中:As shown in FIG. 16, the second device 500 may include a receiving unit 501 and a processing unit 503. among them:
接收单元501,可用于接收第一设备发送的第一参考信号,所述第一参考信号用于相位跟踪。其中,所述第一参考信号映射在第一符号上,所述第一符号包括第二符号之前的承载数据信号的符号,所述第二符号是指所述时域单元内承载解调参考信号的第1个符号,或所述第二符号是指所述时域单元内连续的多个符号,所述连续的多个符号包括承载解调参考信号的第一个符号;The receiving unit 501 is configured to receive a first reference signal sent by the first device, where the first reference signal is used for phase tracking. The first reference signal is mapped on the first symbol, the first symbol includes a symbol of a bearer data signal before the second symbol, and the second symbol refers to a bearer demodulation reference signal in the time domain unit. The first symbol, or the second symbol, refers to a plurality of consecutive symbols in the time domain unit, the consecutive plurality of symbols including a first symbol carrying a demodulation reference signal;
处理单元503,可用于利用所述第一参考信号进行相位跟踪。The processing unit 503 is configured to perform phase tracking by using the first reference signal.
关于PTRS时域映射规则可参考前述实施例一至实施例三,这里不再赘述。For the PTRS time domain mapping rule, refer to the foregoing Embodiment 1 to Embodiment 3, and details are not described herein again.
可以理解的,关于第二设备500包括的各个功能单元的具体实现可参考前述各个实施例,这里不再赘述。For a specific implementation of the various functional units included in the second device 500, reference may be made to the foregoing various embodiments, and details are not described herein again.
参见图17,图17示出了本申请提供一种无线通信系统、终端及网络设备。无线通信系统20包括:网络设备600和终端设备700。其中,网络设备600可以为图5实施例中的网络设备300,终端设备700可以为图4实施例中的终端200。无线通信系统20可以是图3描述的无线通信系统100。下面分别描述。Referring to FIG. 17, FIG. 17 illustrates a wireless communication system, a terminal, and a network device. The wireless communication system 20 includes a network device 600 and a terminal device 700. The network device 600 may be the network device 300 in the embodiment of FIG. 5, and the terminal device 700 may be the terminal 200 in the embodiment of FIG. Wireless communication system 20 may be the wireless communication system 100 depicted in FIG. Described separately below.
如图17所示,网络设备600可包括:处理单元601和发送单元603。其中:As shown in FIG. 17, the network device 600 may include a processing unit 601 and a transmitting unit 603. among them:
处理单元601,可用于生成第一指示信息;所述第一指示信息指示至少2组第一参考信号占用的时频资源的位置,所述至少2组第一参考信号各自关联的天线端口不是准共址的;The processing unit 601 is configured to generate first indication information, where the first indication information indicates a location of time-frequency resources occupied by at least two groups of first reference signals, and an antenna port associated with each of the at least two groups of first reference signals is not Co-located
发送单元603,可用于发送所述第一指示信息;The sending unit 603 is configured to send the first indication information.
发送单元603,还可用于发送数据信号,所述数据信号不映射在所述至少2组第一参考信号占用的时频资源上。The sending unit 603 is further configured to send a data signal, where the data signal is not mapped on a time-frequency resource occupied by the at least two sets of first reference signals.
可以理解的,关于网络设备600包括的各个功能单元的具体实现可参考前述图14或图15实施例,这里不再赘述。For a specific implementation of the various functional units included in the network device 600, reference may be made to the foregoing FIG. 14 or FIG. 15 embodiment, and details are not described herein again.
如图17所示,终端设备700可包括:接收单元701和处理单元703。其中:As shown in FIG. 17, the terminal device 700 may include a receiving unit 701 and a processing unit 703. among them:
接收单元701,可用于接收第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息指示至少2组第一参考信号占用的时频资源的位置,所述至少2组第一参考信号各自关联的天线端口不是准共址的;The receiving unit 701 is configured to receive first indication information, where the first indication information indicates a location of time-frequency resources occupied by at least two groups of first reference signals, and an antenna port associated with each of the at least two groups of first reference signals is not Co-located
处理单元703,可用于根据所述第一指示信息确定所述至少2组第一参考信号占用的时频资源;The processing unit 703 is configured to determine, according to the first indication information, a time-frequency resource occupied by the at least two groups of first reference signals;
接收单元701,还可用于接收数据信号,所述数据信号不映射在所述至少2组第一参考信号占用的时频资源上。The receiving unit 701 is further configured to receive a data signal, where the data signal is not mapped on a time-frequency resource occupied by the at least two groups of first reference signals.
可以理解的,关于终端设备700包括的各个功能单元的具体实现可参考图14或图15实施例,这里不再赘述。It can be understood that the specific implementation of each functional unit included in the terminal device 700 can be referred to the embodiment of FIG. 14 or FIG. 15 , and details are not described herein again.
参见图18,图18示出了本申请提供的一种装置的结构示意图。如图18所示,装置80可包括:处理器801,以及耦合于处理器801的一个或多个接口802。可选的,装置80还可以包括存储器803。可选的,装置80可以是一种芯片。其中:Referring to FIG. 18, FIG. 18 is a schematic structural diagram of a device provided by the present application. As shown in FIG. 18, apparatus 80 can include a processor 801 and one or more interfaces 802 coupled to processor 801. Alternatively, device 80 may also include a memory 803. Alternatively, device 80 can be a chip. among them:
处理器801可用于读取和执行计算机可读指令。具体实现中,处理器801可主要包括控制器、运算器和寄存器。其中,控制器主要负责指令译码,并为指令对应的操作发出控 制信号。运算器主要负责执行定点或浮点算数运算操作、移位操作以及逻辑操作等,也可以执行地址运算和转换。寄存器主要负责保存指令执行过程中临时存放的寄存器操作数和中间操作结果等。具体实现中,处理器801的硬件架构可以是专用集成电路(Application Specific Integrated Circuits,ASIC)架构、MIPS架构、ARM架构或者NP架构等等。处理器801可以是单核的,也可以是多核的。The processor 801 can be used to read and execute computer readable instructions. In a specific implementation, the processor 801 can mainly include a controller, an operator, and a register. Among them, the controller is mainly responsible for instruction decoding, and sends a control signal for the operation corresponding to the instruction. The operator is mainly responsible for performing fixed-point or floating-point arithmetic operations, shift operations, and logic operations, as well as performing address operations and conversions. The register is mainly responsible for saving the register operands and intermediate operation results temporarily stored during the execution of the instruction. In a specific implementation, the hardware architecture of the processor 801 may be an Application Specific Integrated Circuits (ASIC) architecture, a MIPS architecture, an ARM architecture, or an NP architecture. The processor 801 can be single core or multi-core.
存储器803可用于存储包含计算机可取指令的程序代码,还可用于存储处理器801的输入/输出数据。The memory 803 can be used to store program code containing computer-readable instructions and can also be used to store input/output data of the processor 801.
输入/输出接口802可用于输入待处理的数据至处理器801,并且可以向外输出处理器801的处理结果。具体实现中,接口802可以是通用输入输出(General Purpose Input Output,GPIO)接口,可以和多个外围设备(如显示器(LCD)、摄像头、射频模块等等)连接。接口802还可以包括多个独立的接口,例如以太网接口、LCD接口、Camera接口等,分别负责不同外围设备和处理器801之间的通信。The input/output interface 802 can be used to input data to be processed to the processor 801, and can output the processing result of the processor 801 to the outside. In a specific implementation, the interface 802 can be a General Purpose Input Output (GPIO) interface, and can be connected to multiple peripheral devices (such as a display (LCD), a camera, a radio frequency module, etc.). The interface 802 may also include a plurality of independent interfaces, such as an Ethernet interface, an LCD interface, a Camera interface, etc., responsible for communication between different peripheral devices and the processor 801, respectively.
本申请中,处理器901可用于从存储器中调用图8实施例提供的信号传输方法在第一设备侧的实现程序或者图14或图15实施例在网络设备侧的实现程序,并执行该程序包含的指令。接口902可用于输出处理器901的执行结果。In the present application, the processor 901 can be used to invoke the implementation program of the signal transmission method provided by the embodiment of FIG. 8 on the first device side or the implementation program of the embodiment of FIG. 14 or FIG. 15 on the network device side from the memory, and execute the program. Contained instructions. The interface 902 can be used to output the execution result of the processor 901.
需要说明的,处理器801、接口802各自对应的功能既可以通过硬件设计实现,也可以通过软件设计来实现,还可以通过软硬件结合的方式来实现,这里不作限制。It should be noted that the corresponding functions of the processor 801 and the interface 802 can be implemented by using a hardware design or a software design, and can also be implemented by a combination of software and hardware, which is not limited herein.
参见图19,图19示出了本申请提供的一种装置的结构示意图。如图19所示,装置90可包括:处理器901,以及耦合于处理器901的一个或多个接口902。可选的,装置90还可以包括存储器903。可选的,装置90可以是一种芯片。其中:Referring to FIG. 19, FIG. 19 is a schematic structural diagram of a device provided by the present application. As shown in FIG. 19, apparatus 90 can include a processor 901 and one or more interfaces 902 coupled to processor 901. Optionally, the device 90 may further include a memory 903. Alternatively, device 90 can be a chip. among them:
处理器901可用于读取和执行计算机可读指令。具体实现中,处理器901可主要包括控制器、运算器和寄存器。其中,控制器主要负责指令译码,并为指令对应的操作发出控制信号。运算器主要负责执行定点或浮点算数运算操作、移位操作以及逻辑操作等,也可以执行地址运算和转换。寄存器主要负责保存指令执行过程中临时存放的寄存器操作数和中间操作结果等。具体实现中,处理器901的硬件架构可以是专用集成电路(Application Specific Integrated Circuits,ASIC)架构等等。处理器901可以是单核的,也可以是多核的。The processor 901 can be used to read and execute computer readable instructions. In a specific implementation, the processor 901 may mainly include a controller, an operator, and a register. Among them, the controller is mainly responsible for instruction decoding, and sends a control signal for the operation corresponding to the instruction. The operator is mainly responsible for performing fixed-point or floating-point arithmetic operations, shift operations, and logic operations, as well as performing address operations and conversions. The register is mainly responsible for saving the register operands and intermediate operation results temporarily stored during the execution of the instruction. In a specific implementation, the hardware architecture of the processor 901 may be an Application Specific Integrated Circuits (ASIC) architecture or the like. The processor 901 can be single core or multi-core.
存储器903可用于存储包含计算机可取指令的程序代码,还可用于存储处理器901的输入/输出数据。The memory 903 can be used to store program code containing computer-readable instructions and can also be used to store input/output data of the processor 901.
输入/输出接口902可用于输入待处理的数据至处理器901,并且可以向外输出处理器901的处理结果。The input/output interface 902 can be used to input data to be processed to the processor 901, and can output the processing result of the processor 901 to the outside.
本申请中,处理器901可用于从存储器中调用图8实施例提供的信号传输方法在第二设备侧的实现程序或者图14或图15实施例在终端设备侧的实现程序,并执行该程序包含的指令。接口902可用于输出处理器901的执行结果。In the present application, the processor 901 can be used to call the implementation program of the signal transmission method provided by the embodiment of FIG. 8 on the second device side from the memory or the implementation program of the embodiment of FIG. 14 or FIG. 15 on the terminal device side, and execute the program. Contained instructions. The interface 902 can be used to output the execution result of the processor 901.
需要说明的,处理器901、接口902各自对应的功能既可以通过硬件设计实现,也可以通过软件设计来实现,还可以通过软硬件结合的方式来实现,这里不作限制。It should be noted that the corresponding functions of the processor 901 and the interface 902 can be implemented by using a hardware design or a software design, and can also be implemented by a combination of software and hardware, which is not limited herein.
综上,实施本申请提供的技术方案,可确保映射在DMRS之前的符号上的数据信道也会有PT-RS映射,从而保证相噪估计性能。In summary, the implementation of the technical solution provided by the present application ensures that the data channel mapped on the symbol before the DMRS also has a PT-RS mapping, thereby ensuring phase noise estimation performance.
本领域普通技术人员可以理解实现上述实施例方法中的全部或部分流程,该流程可以由计算机程序来指令相关的硬件完成,该程序可存储于计算机可读取存储介质中,该程序 在执行时,可包括如上述各方法实施例的流程。而前述的存储介质包括:ROM或随机存储记忆体RAM、磁碟或者光盘等各种可存储程序代码的介质。One of ordinary skill in the art can understand all or part of the process of implementing the above embodiments, which can be completed by a computer program to instruct related hardware, the program can be stored in a computer readable storage medium, when the program is executed The flow of the method embodiments as described above may be included. The foregoing storage medium includes various media that can store program codes, such as a ROM or a random access memory RAM, a magnetic disk, or an optical disk.

Claims (30)

  1. 一种信号传输方法,其特征在于,包括:A signal transmission method, comprising:
    第一设备向第二设备发送第一参考信号,所述第一参考信号用于相位跟踪;所述第一参考信号映射在第一符号上,所述第一符号包括时域单元内第二符号之前的承载数据信号的符号,所述第二符号是指所述时域单元内承载解调参考信号的第1个符号,或所述第二符号是指所述时域单元内连续的多个符号,所述连续的多个符号包括承载解调参考信号的第一个符号。The first device sends a first reference signal to the second device, where the first reference signal is used for phase tracking; the first reference signal is mapped on the first symbol, and the first symbol includes the second symbol in the time domain unit a symbol carrying a data signal, the second symbol refers to a first symbol carrying a demodulation reference signal in the time domain unit, or the second symbol refers to a plurality of consecutive ones in the time domain unit The symbol, the consecutive plurality of symbols comprising a first symbol carrying a demodulation reference signal.
  2. 一种信号传输方法,其特征在于,包括:A signal transmission method, comprising:
    第二设备接收第一设备发送的第一参考信号,所述第一参考信号用于相位跟踪;所述第一参考信号映射在第一符号上,所述第一符号包括第二符号之前的承载数据信号的符号,所述第二符号是指所述时域单元内承载解调参考信号的第1个符号,或所述第二符号是指所述时域单元内连续的多个符号,所述连续的多个符号包括承载解调参考信号的第一个符号。The second device receives a first reference signal sent by the first device, where the first reference signal is used for phase tracking; the first reference signal is mapped on the first symbol, and the first symbol includes a bearer before the second symbol a symbol of a data signal, the second symbol refers to a first symbol carrying a demodulation reference signal in the time domain unit, or the second symbol refers to a plurality of consecutive symbols in the time domain unit, The plurality of consecutive symbols includes a first symbol carrying a demodulation reference signal.
  3. 如权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,从承载数据信号的第1个符号开始,所述第一参考信号被均匀映射在所述第二符号之前的符号上。The method of claim 1 or 2, wherein the first reference signal is uniformly mapped onto the symbol preceding the second symbol, starting from the first symbol carrying the data signal.
  4. 如权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述第二符号之前,用于承载所述第一参考信号的符号的索引与第一差值有关,所述第一差值为等于承载所述第二参考信号的第一个符号的索引和承载数据信号的第一个符号的索引的差值。The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein before the second symbol, an index of a symbol for carrying the first reference signal is related to a first difference, the first difference being Equal to the difference between the index of the first symbol carrying the second reference signal and the index of the first symbol carrying the data signal.
  5. 如权利要求4所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述第二符号之前,用于承载所述第一参考信号的符号的索引l为:The method according to claim 4, wherein before the second symbol, the index l of the symbol used to carry the first reference signal is:
    Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-100001
    Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-100001
    或者,or,
    l=l 0-[L-(-H 2)modL]-L×l' l=l 0 -[L-(-H 2 )modL]-L×l'
    其中,l'=0,1,2,...;Where l'=0,1,2,...;
    其中,l 0表示承载所述第二参考信号的第一个符号的索引,L表示所述第一参考信号的时域密度的倒数,H2表示所述第一差值。 Wherein, l 0 represents an index of a first symbol carrying the second reference signal, L represents a reciprocal of the time domain density of the first reference signal, and H2 represents the first difference.
  6. 如权利要求1-5中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一参考信号在时域上被均匀映射在索引大于所述第二符号的索引的符号上。The method according to any of the claims 1-5, wherein the first reference signal is uniformly mapped on the time domain over a symbol whose index is greater than the index of the second symbol.
  7. 如权利要求6所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一参考信号映射在所述第二符号之后的承载数据信号的最后一个符号上,且按照符号索引值递减的顺序,在时域上被均匀映射在所述第二符号之后的符号上。The method according to claim 6, wherein said first reference signal is mapped on a last symbol of a bearer data signal following said second symbol, and in a time domain in descending order of symbol index values It is evenly mapped on the symbol following the second symbol.
  8. 如权利要求6所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述第二符号之后,用于承载所述第一参考信号的符号的索引与所述第二符号之后的符号个数相关。The method of claim 6 wherein after said second symbol, an index of a symbol used to carry said first reference signal is associated with a number of symbols following said second symbol.
  9. 如权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述第二符号之后,用于承载所述第一参考信号的符号的索引l为:The method according to claim 8, wherein after the second symbol, an index l of a symbol for carrying the first reference signal is:
    Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-100002
    Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-100002
    或者,or,
    l=l DM-RS+[L-(-H 1)modL]+L PT-RS×l' l=l DM-RS +[L-(-H 1 )modL]+L PT-RS ×l'
    其中,l'=0,1,2,...;Where l'=0,1,2,...;
    其中,l DM-RS表示所述第二符号中承载所述第二参考信号的最后一个符号的索引,L表示所述第一参考信号的时域密度的倒数,H1表示所述第二符号之后的符号个数。 Wherein the DM-RS indicates an index of the last symbol carrying the second reference signal in the second symbol, L represents a reciprocal of the time domain density of the first reference signal, and H1 represents the second symbol The number of symbols.
  10. 如权利要求1-9中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一参考信号被映射在除第一资源集合之外的资源上,所述第一资源集合包括承载以下至少一项信号的资源:物理下行控制信道、物理上行控制信道、同步信号块、信道状态信息参考信号、探测参考信号或解调参考信号。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 9, wherein the first reference signal is mapped on a resource other than the first resource set, and the first resource set includes at least one of the following The resource of the item signal: a physical downlink control channel, a physical uplink control channel, a synchronization signal block, a channel state information reference signal, a sounding reference signal, or a demodulation reference signal.
  11. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, comprising:
    处理单元,用于将第一参考信号映射在第一符号上;所述第一参考信号用于相位跟踪;所述第一符号包括时域单元内第二符号之前的承载数据信号的符号,所述第二符号是指所述时域单元内承载解调参考信号的第1个符号,或所述第二符号是指所述时域单元内连续的多个符号,所述连续的多个符号包括承载解调参考信号的第一个符号;a processing unit, configured to map the first reference signal on the first symbol; the first reference signal is used for phase tracking; and the first symbol includes a symbol of the bearer data signal before the second symbol in the time domain unit, where The second symbol refers to a first symbol that carries a demodulation reference signal in the time domain unit, or the second symbol refers to a plurality of consecutive symbols in the time domain unit, the consecutive multiple symbols Including a first symbol carrying a demodulation reference signal;
    发送单元,用于向第二设备发送所述第一参考信号。And a sending unit, configured to send the first reference signal to the second device.
  12. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, comprising:
    接收单元,用于接收第一设备发送的第一参考信号,所述第一参考信号用于相位跟踪;所述第一参考信号映射在第一符号上,所述第一符号包括第二符号之前的承载数据信号的符号,所述第二符号是指所述时域单元内承载解调参考信号的第1个符号,或所述第二符号是指所述时域单元内连续的多个符号,所述连续的多个符号包括承载解调参考信号的第一个符号;a receiving unit, configured to receive a first reference signal sent by the first device, where the first reference signal is used for phase tracking; the first reference signal is mapped on the first symbol, and the first symbol is included before the second symbol a symbol carrying a data signal, the second symbol refers to a first symbol carrying a demodulation reference signal in the time domain unit, or the second symbol refers to a plurality of consecutive symbols in the time domain unit The consecutive plurality of symbols include a first symbol carrying a demodulation reference signal;
    处理单元,用于利用所述第一参考信号进行相位跟踪。And a processing unit, configured to perform phase tracking by using the first reference signal.
  13. 如权利要求11或12的通信装置,其特征在于,从承载数据信号的第1个符号开始,所述第一参考信号被均匀映射在所述第二符号之前的符号上。A communication apparatus according to claim 11 or 12, wherein said first reference signal is uniformly mapped on a symbol preceding said second symbol starting from a first symbol carrying a data signal.
  14. 如权利要求11或12的通信装置,其特征在于,在所述第二符号之前,用于承载所述第一参考信号的符号的索引与第一差值有关,所述第一差值为等于承载所述第二参考信号的第一个符号的索引和承载数据信号的第一个符号的索引的差值。The communication apparatus according to claim 11 or 12, wherein before said second symbol, an index of a symbol for carrying said first reference signal is related to a first difference, said first difference being equal to And a difference between an index of the first symbol carrying the second reference signal and an index of the first symbol carrying the data signal.
  15. 如权利要求14的通信装置,其特征在于,在所述第二符号之前,用于承载所述第一参考信号的符号的索引l为:The communication apparatus according to claim 14, wherein before said second symbol, an index l of a symbol for carrying said first reference signal is:
    Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-100003
    Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-100003
    或者,or,
    l=l 0-[L-(-H 2)modL]-L×l' l=l 0 -[L-(-H 2 )modL]-L×l'
    其中,l'=0,1,2,...;Where l'=0,1,2,...;
    其中,l 0表示承载所述第二参考信号的第一个符号的索引,L表示所述第一参考信号的时域密度的倒数,H2表示所述第一差值。 Wherein, l 0 represents an index of a first symbol carrying the second reference signal, L represents a reciprocal of the time domain density of the first reference signal, and H2 represents the first difference.
  16. 如权利要求11-15中任一项的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一参考信号在时域上被均匀映射在索引大于所述第二符号的索引的符号上。A communication apparatus according to any one of claims 11 to 15, wherein said first reference signal is uniformly mapped on the time domain to a symbol whose index is larger than an index of said second symbol.
  17. 如权利要求16的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一参考信号映射在所述第二符号之后的承载数据信号的最后一个符号上,且按照符号索引值递减的顺序,在时域上被均匀映射在所述第二符号之后的符号上。The communication apparatus according to claim 16, wherein said first reference signal is mapped on a last symbol of a bearer data signal subsequent to said second symbol, and is in a time domain in descending order of symbol index values Uniformly mapped on symbols following the second symbol.
  18. 如权利要求16的通信装置,其特征在于,在所述第二符号之后,用于承载所述第一参考信号的符号的索引与所述第二符号之后的符号个数相关。The communication apparatus according to claim 16, wherein after said second symbol, an index of a symbol for carrying said first reference signal is associated with a number of symbols subsequent to said second symbol.
  19. 如权利要求18的通信装置,其特征在于,在所述第二符号之后,用于承载所述第一参考信号的符号的索引l为:The communication apparatus according to claim 18, wherein after said second symbol, an index l of a symbol for carrying said first reference signal is:
    Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-100004
    Figure PCTCN2018080387-appb-100004
    或者,or,
    l=l DM-RS+[L-(-H 1)modL]+L PT-RS×l' l=l DM-RS +[L-(-H 1 )modL]+L PT-RS ×l'
    其中,l'=0,1,2,...;Where l'=0,1,2,...;
    其中,l DM-RS表示所述第二符号中承载所述第二参考信号的最后一个符号的索引,L表示所述第一参考信号的时域密度的倒数,H1表示所述第二符号之后的符号个数。 Wherein the DM-RS indicates an index of the last symbol carrying the second reference signal in the second symbol, L represents a reciprocal of the time domain density of the first reference signal, and H1 represents the second symbol The number of symbols.
  20. 如权利要求11-19中任一项的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一参考信号被映射在除第一资源集合之外的资源上,所述第一资源集合包括承载以下至少一项信号的资源:物理下行控制信道、物理上行控制信道、同步信号块、信道状态信息参考信号、探测参考信号或解调参考信号。The communication apparatus according to any one of claims 11 to 19, wherein the first reference signal is mapped on a resource other than the first resource set, and the first resource set includes at least one of the following Signal resources: physical downlink control channel, physical uplink control channel, synchronization signal block, channel state information reference signal, sounding reference signal or demodulation reference signal.
  21. 一种信号传输方法,其特征在于,包括:A signal transmission method, comprising:
    网络设备发送第一指示信息;所述第一指示信息指示至少2组第一参考信号占用的时 频资源的位置,所述至少2组第一参考信号各自关联的天线端口不是准共址的;The first indication information is sent by the network device, where the first indication information indicates the location of the time-frequency resource occupied by the at least two groups of the first reference signals, and the antenna ports associated with the at least two groups of the first reference signals are not quasi-co-located;
    所述网络设备发送数据信号,所述数据信号不映射在所述至少2组第一参考信号占用的时频资源上。The network device sends a data signal, where the data signal is not mapped on a time-frequency resource occupied by the at least two groups of first reference signals.
  22. 一种信号传输方法,其特征在于,包括:A signal transmission method, comprising:
    终端设备接收第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息指示至少2组第一参考信号占用的时频资源的位置,所述至少2组第一参考信号各自关联的天线端口不是准共址的;The terminal device receives the first indication information, where the first indication information indicates the location of the time-frequency resource occupied by the at least two groups of the first reference signals, and the antenna ports respectively associated with the at least two groups of the first reference signals are not quasi-co-located;
    终端设备根据所述第一指示信息确定所述至少2组第一参考信号占用的时频资源;Determining, by the terminal device, time-frequency resources occupied by the at least two groups of first reference signals according to the first indication information;
    所述终端设备接收数据信号,所述数据信号不映射在所述至少2组第一参考信号占用的时频资源上。The terminal device receives a data signal, and the data signal is not mapped on a time-frequency resource occupied by the at least two groups of first reference signals.
  23. 如权利要求21或22所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息包括第一信息和第二信息,其中,所述第一信息用于确定所述第一参考信号占用的子载波;所述第二信息用于确定所述第一参考信号占用的符号;所述第一信息包括以下至少一项:所述第一参考信号的发送使能信息、所述第一参考信号的天线端口在一组第三参考信号天线端口中关联的第三参考信号天线端口的指示信息、所述一组第三参考信号天线端口的指示信息、或所述第一参考信号的频域密度与调度带宽门限值的关联关系的指示信息;所述第二信息包括:所述第一参考信号的时域密度与调制阶数门限值的关联关系的指示信息。The method according to claim 21 or 22, wherein the first indication information comprises first information and second information, wherein the first information is used to determine a subcarrier occupied by the first reference signal The second information is used to determine a symbol occupied by the first reference signal; the first information includes at least one of: a transmission enable information of the first reference signal, an antenna of the first reference signal Indication information of a third reference signal antenna port associated with a port in a set of third reference signal antenna ports, indication information of the set of third reference signal antenna ports, or frequency domain density and scheduling of the first reference signal The indication information of the association relationship of the bandwidth threshold value; the second information includes: indication information of a relationship between a time domain density of the first reference signal and a modulation order threshold value.
  24. 如权利要求23所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一参考信号占用的子载波包括:所述第三设备调度给所述第四设备的最大调度带宽对应的频域密度下的子载波。The method according to claim 23, wherein the subcarriers occupied by the first reference signal comprise: subcarriers in a frequency domain density corresponding to a maximum scheduling bandwidth of the fourth device scheduled by the third device .
  25. 如权利要求23或24所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一参考信号占用的符号包括:所述第三设备调度给所述第四设备的最大调制阶数对应的时域密度下的子载波。The method according to claim 23 or 24, wherein the symbol occupied by the first reference signal comprises: a time domain density corresponding to a maximum modulation order of the third device scheduled to the fourth device Subcarrier.
  26. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, comprising:
    处理单元,用于生成第一指示信息;所述第一指示信息指示至少2组第一参考信号占用的时频资源的位置,所述至少2组第一参考信号各自关联的天线端口不是准共址的;a processing unit, configured to generate first indication information, where the first indication information indicates a location of a time-frequency resource occupied by at least two groups of first reference signals, and an antenna port associated with each of the at least two groups of first reference signals is not a quasi-common Address
    发送单元,用于发送所述第一指示信息;a sending unit, configured to send the first indication information;
    所述发送单元还用于发送数据信号,所述数据信号不映射在所述至少2组第一参考信号占用的时频资源上。The sending unit is further configured to send a data signal, where the data signal is not mapped on a time-frequency resource occupied by the at least two groups of first reference signals.
  27. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, comprising:
    接收单元,用于接收第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息指示至少2组第一参考信号占用的时频资源的位置,所述至少2组第一参考信号各自关联的天线端口不是准共址的;a receiving unit, configured to receive first indication information, where the first indication information indicates a location of a time-frequency resource occupied by at least two groups of first reference signals, and an antenna port associated with each of the at least two groups of first reference signals is not a quasi-common Address
    处理单元,用于根据所述第一指示信息确定所述至少2组第一参考信号占用的时频资源;a processing unit, configured to determine, according to the first indication information, a time-frequency resource occupied by the at least two groups of first reference signals;
    所述接收单元,还用于接收数据信号,所述数据信号不映射在所述至少2组第一参考信号占用的时频资源上。The receiving unit is further configured to receive a data signal, where the data signal is not mapped on a time-frequency resource occupied by the at least two sets of first reference signals.
  28. 如权利要求26或27所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息包括第一信息和第二信息,其中,所述第一信息用于确定所述第一参考信号占用的子载波;所述第二信息用于确定所述第一参考信号占用的符号;所述第一信息包括以下至少一项:所述第一参考信号的发送使能信息、所述第一参考信号的天线端口在一组第三参考信号天线端口中关联的第三参考信号天线端口的指示信息、所述一组第三参考信号天线端口的指示信息、或所述第一参考信号的频域密度与调度带宽门限值的关联关系的指示信息;所述第二信息包括:所述第一参考信号的时域密度与调制阶数门限值的关联关系的指示信息。The communication device according to claim 26 or 27, wherein the first indication information comprises first information and second information, wherein the first information is used to determine a child occupied by the first reference signal The second information is used to determine a symbol occupied by the first reference signal; the first information includes at least one of: a transmission enable information of the first reference signal, and a first reference signal The indication information of the third reference signal antenna port associated with the antenna port in a set of third reference signal antenna ports, the indication information of the set of third reference signal antenna ports, or the frequency domain density of the first reference signal The indication information of the association relationship of the bandwidth threshold is scheduled; the second information includes: indication information of a relationship between a time domain density of the first reference signal and a modulation order threshold.
  29. 如权利要求28所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一参考信号占用的子载波包括:所述第三设备调度给所述第四设备的最大调度带宽对应的频域密度下的子载波。The communication device according to claim 28, wherein the subcarrier occupied by the first reference signal comprises: a subcarrier at a frequency domain density corresponding to a maximum scheduling bandwidth of the fourth device scheduled by the third device Carrier.
  30. 如权利要求28或29所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一参考信号占用的符号包括:所述第三设备调度给所述第四设备的最大调制阶数对应的时域密度下的子载波。The communication device according to claim 28 or 29, wherein the symbol occupied by the first reference signal comprises: a time domain density corresponding to a maximum modulation order of the third device scheduled to the fourth device Subcarriers.
PCT/CN2018/080387 2017-03-24 2018-03-24 Method, apparatus and system for signal transmission WO2018171783A1 (en)

Priority Applications (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
BR112019019840A BR112019019840A2 (en) 2017-03-24 2018-03-24 signal transmission method, apparatus, and system
JP2019552548A JP7061619B2 (en) 2017-03-24 2018-03-24 Signal transmission methods, devices, and systems
KR1020197030983A KR102305312B1 (en) 2017-03-24 2018-03-24 Method, apparatus, and system for signal transmission
EP18772285.5A EP3605977B1 (en) 2017-03-24 2018-03-24 Method, apparatus and system for signal transmission
CA3057550A CA3057550A1 (en) 2017-03-24 2018-03-24 Signal transmission method, apparatus, and system
US16/580,773 US20200022172A1 (en) 2017-03-24 2019-09-24 Signal transmission method, apparatus, and system

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201710184763.X 2017-03-24
CN201710184763 2017-03-24
CN201710814891.8A CN108632179B (en) 2017-03-24 2017-09-11 Signal transmission method, device and system
CN201710814891.8 2017-09-11

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US16/580,773 Continuation US20200022172A1 (en) 2017-03-24 2019-09-24 Signal transmission method, apparatus, and system

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2018171783A1 true WO2018171783A1 (en) 2018-09-27

Family

ID=63584138

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2018/080387 WO2018171783A1 (en) 2017-03-24 2018-03-24 Method, apparatus and system for signal transmission

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2018171783A1 (en)

Cited By (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2021019743A1 (en) * 2019-07-31 2021-02-04 株式会社Nttドコモ Terminal
GB2562117B (en) * 2017-05-05 2021-07-28 Samsung Electronics Co Ltd Phase tracking reference signal
CN114285703A (en) * 2022-03-03 2022-04-05 广州慧睿思通科技股份有限公司 Method, chip, device and storage medium for estimating physical uplink shared channel
US20220166565A1 (en) * 2017-04-28 2022-05-26 Panasonic Intellectual Property Corporation Of America Measurement apparatus and measurement method

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20130336282A1 (en) * 2011-03-01 2013-12-19 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Transmitter apparatus, receiver apparatus, communication system, communication method, and integrated circuit
CN104170275A (en) * 2012-02-11 2014-11-26 Lg电子株式会社 Method and device for receiving downlink data channel in multi-cell based wireless communication system
CN105052227A (en) * 2013-04-26 2015-11-11 英特尔Ip公司 Hybrid reference signals for wireless communication
CN105846976A (en) * 2015-01-15 2016-08-10 株式会社Ntt都科摩 Multi-user multiple-input multiple-output transmission method and base station in wireless communication system

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20130336282A1 (en) * 2011-03-01 2013-12-19 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Transmitter apparatus, receiver apparatus, communication system, communication method, and integrated circuit
CN104170275A (en) * 2012-02-11 2014-11-26 Lg电子株式会社 Method and device for receiving downlink data channel in multi-cell based wireless communication system
CN105052227A (en) * 2013-04-26 2015-11-11 英特尔Ip公司 Hybrid reference signals for wireless communication
CN105846976A (en) * 2015-01-15 2016-08-10 株式会社Ntt都科摩 Multi-user multiple-input multiple-output transmission method and base station in wireless communication system

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
See also references of EP3605977A4 *

Cited By (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20220166565A1 (en) * 2017-04-28 2022-05-26 Panasonic Intellectual Property Corporation Of America Measurement apparatus and measurement method
US11711178B2 (en) * 2017-04-28 2023-07-25 Panasonic Intellectual Property Corporation Of America Measurement apparatus and measurement method
GB2562117B (en) * 2017-05-05 2021-07-28 Samsung Electronics Co Ltd Phase tracking reference signal
US11552754B2 (en) 2017-05-05 2023-01-10 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for phase tracking reference signal in a wireless communication system
WO2021019743A1 (en) * 2019-07-31 2021-02-04 株式会社Nttドコモ Terminal
CN114285703A (en) * 2022-03-03 2022-04-05 广州慧睿思通科技股份有限公司 Method, chip, device and storage medium for estimating physical uplink shared channel

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
KR102305312B1 (en) Method, apparatus, and system for signal transmission
CN112020139B (en) Communication method and device
JP2022095955A (en) Setting information transmission/reception method, device, and communication system
WO2018082404A1 (en) Resource indication method, and related device and system
WO2016161977A1 (en) Pucch resource allocation method in carrier aggregation and equipments thereof
CN108811074B (en) Information transmission method and device
CN111344989B (en) Method and apparatus for setting reference signal in wireless communication system
JP7570437B2 (en) Activation of more than one TCI state for one or more CORESETs
US10420137B2 (en) System and method for signal density reduction in the frequency domain
WO2021062689A1 (en) Method and apparatus for uplink transmission
WO2019029426A1 (en) Method and apparatus used for transmitting reference signals
WO2018171783A1 (en) Method, apparatus and system for signal transmission
CN110351058A (en) A kind of method for transmitting signals and communication equipment
CN115299135B (en) Method and device for parameter setting
EP3573274A1 (en) Communication method and network device
WO2018171792A1 (en) Method, apparatus and system for reference signal transmission
CN110087248A (en) Base station, user apparatus and wireless communications method
EP3166365B1 (en) Base station, user terminal, radio communication system, and communication control method
CN110557836B (en) A method, apparatus and device for configuring transmission bandwidth
US20190305902A1 (en) Reference signal transmission method and apparatus
WO2016169479A1 (en) Data transmission method and device
CN108076442B (en) A method for determining the length of a PUSCH transport block and user equipment
WO2019029464A1 (en) Data transmission method and device for flexible duplex system
EP4513808A1 (en) Information transmission method and apparatus and communication device
CN118368727A (en) A method and device for determining scheduling information

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 18772285

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 3057550

Country of ref document: CA

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2019552548

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

REG Reference to national code

Ref country code: BR

Ref legal event code: B01A

Ref document number: 112019019840

Country of ref document: BR

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 20197030983

Country of ref document: KR

Kind code of ref document: A

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2018772285

Country of ref document: EP

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2018772285

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20191024

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 112019019840

Country of ref document: BR

Kind code of ref document: A2

Effective date: 20190923